MINI Hardtop (2014) - Automobile

Hardtop (2014) - Automobile MINI - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free Hardtop (2014) MINI in PDF.

📄 230 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice MINI Hardtop (2014) - page 3
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Automotive
Brand MINI
Model Hardtop (2014)
Engine Options 1.5L 3-cylinder turbo or 2.0L 4-cylinder turbo
Transmission 6-speed manual or 6-speed automatic
Fuel Type Gasoline (unleaded, 91 octane recommended)
Overall Length (approx.) 3,821 mm (150.4 in)
Overall Width (approx.) 1,727 mm (68.0 in)
Overall Height (approx.) 1,414 mm (55.7 in)
Wheelbase 2,495 mm (98.2 in)
Curb Weight (approx.) 1,240 kg (2,734 lb)
Fuel Tank Capacity 50 L (13.2 US gal)
Seating Capacity 4
Safety Systems ABS, DSC, front/side/knee airbags, Tire Pressure Monitor, Flat Tire Monitor
Maintenance System MINI Condition Based Service (CBS)
Special Features Onboard monitor with iDrive, Voice activation, Comfort Access, Panoramic glass sunroof, Automatic climate control
Care & Cleaning Use MINI-approved products; wash regularly, treat leather, protect chrome

Frequently Asked Questions - Hardtop (2014) MINI

What type of fuel should I use for my MINI Hardtop 2014?
Use unleaded gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91 (AKI). Refer to the fuel filler flap for the correct fuel type.
How do I reset the tire pressure monitor?
After correcting tire pressure, go to Vehicle Info > Vehicle status > Tire Pressure Monitor and select Reset. Drive for a few minutes to complete initialization.
What is the proper way to jump-start the vehicle?
Use a booster battery with 12V. Connect positive terminal first, then negative to a ground point on your vehicle. Start the donor car, then your MINI. Disconnect in reverse order.
How do I activate the voice control system?
Press the Voice activation button on the steering wheel. Wait for the signal tone, then speak a command such as 'Navigate to' or 'Call'.
What does the Check Control message mean?
The Check Control system displays warnings or information. A red symbol indicates a serious issue; yellow indicates a minor fault. Refer to the Owner's Manual for specific codes.
How often should I change the engine oil?
Oil change intervals are determined by the Condition Based Service (CBS) system, typically between 10,000 and 15,000 miles. Use approved oil grades as listed in the manual.
Can I replace the remote control battery myself?
Yes. Remove the integrated key, then slide the key into the opening to pry off the cover. Replace with a CR2032 battery, positive side up. Reassemble and dispose of the old battery properly.
How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?
From the onboard monitor: Settings > Bluetooth > Add device. Make your phone discoverable and select MINI from the list. Confirm the pairing code on both devices.
What should I do if the panoramic sunroof won't close?
If the pinch protection is triggered, press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and hold until it closes. If it still fails, initialize the system by following the reset procedure in the manual.
How do I tow the vehicle?
Use a tow rope or bar. Attach to the front tow fitting (located behind a cover on the bumper). Ensure the parking brake is released and transmission is in neutral. Maximum towing speed: 30 mph (50 km/h).

User questions about Hardtop (2014) MINI

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Automobile in PDF format for free! Find your manual Hardtop (2014) - MINI and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. Hardtop (2014) by MINI.

USER MANUAL Hardtop (2014) MINI

MINI Owner's Manual for Vehicle

Thank you for choosing a MINI.

The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your MINI.

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the Vehicle.

Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI

The MINI team of BMW AG

Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written

consent of BMW AG, Munich.

US English II/14, 03 14 490

Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached

without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

CONTENTS

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 220.

6 Notes

AT A GLANCE

14 Cockpit
18 Onboard monitor
26 Voice activation system
29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

CONTROLS

34 Opening and closing
47 Adjusting
55 Transporting children safely
59 Driving

71 Displays

86 Lamps

91 Safety

106 Driving stability control systems

110 Driving comfort

127 Climate control

133 Interior equipment

135 Digital compass

141 Storage compartments

DRIVING TIPS

148 Things to remember when driving
151 Loading
155 Saving fuel

MOBILITY

164 Refueling
166 Fuel
168 Wheels and tires
180 Engine compartment
182 Engine oil
185 Coolant
186 Maintenance
188 Replacing components
201 Breakdown assistance
207 Care

REFERENCE

214 Technical data
216 Appendix
218 License Texts and Certifications
220 Everything from A to Z

NOTES

USING THIS OWNER'S MANUAL

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle.

User's manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication

The topics Navigation, Entertainment, Communication and the short commands of the voice activation system can be retrieved via the Integrated Owner's Handbook.

Additional sources of information

Should you have any questions, your service center will be glad to advise you at any time. Information about MINI, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: www.miniusa.com

SYMBOLS

A Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.

Marks the end of a specific item of information.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

»...« Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system..

»...« Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system.

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is also described and illustrated that is not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or the country-specific variants.

This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Handbooks.

On right-hand drive vehicles, some control elements are arranged differently than shown in the illustrations.

STATUS OF THE OWNER'S MANUAL

Basic information

The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.

FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY

Manufacturer

The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktionengesellschaft, BMW AG.

Warranty

Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery - homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homologation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods.

Therefore, have this work performed only by a MINI service center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of the manufacturer of the MINI with appropriately trained personnel.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Parts and accessories

MINI recommends using parts and accessories approved by the manufacturer of the MINI for this purpose.

Your MINI service center is the right contact for genuine MINI parts and accessories, other products approved by the manufacturer of the MINI and related qualified advice.

The manufacturer of the MINI has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to MINI vehicles.

The manufacturer of the MINI assumes responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by MINI.

MINI cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with MINI vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee is also not applicable when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential operating conditions to which components might be exposed on MINI vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with MINI's own stringent quality standards.

California Proposition 65 Warning

California laws require us to state the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used

engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

▶ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▶ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
▶ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.
▶ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
▶ California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for required maintenance measures:

▶ MINI Maintenance system
▶ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models

▶ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

DATA MEMORY

Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that temporarily or permanently store technical information about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the environment:

▶ Operating states of system components, fill levels for instance.
▶ Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rotation speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration.
▶ Malfunctions and faults in important system components, e.g., lights and brakes.
▶ Responses by the vehicle to special situations, e.g., deployment of an airbag, engagement of stability control systems.
▶ Ambient conditions, such as temperature.
This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to optimize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., repair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical information can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, including the manufacturer, using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain further information there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis.

When the vehicle is in use, situations are conceivable in which it might be possible to associate this technical data with individuals if it is combined with other information, e.g., an accident report, damage to the vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert.

Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle locating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

▶ How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened.
▶ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▶ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the

type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safe-rcar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safe-rcar.gov

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone

Simple purple L-shaped border on white background (no text or symbols)

NOTES

the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

Interior view of a car with hands operating controls, dashboard displaying speedometer and map display (no readable text or symbols)

WATCH ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

COCKPIT

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

ALL AROUND THE STEERING WHEEL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MINI 10 11 12 ajaieiaja

1 Power windows 44
2 Exterior mirror operation 52
3 Central locking system 39
4 Lamps

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 2

Front fog lamps 89

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 3

Parking lamps 86

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 4

Low beams 86

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 5

Automatic headlamp control 87

Daytime running lights 87

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 6

Instrument lighting 89

5 Steering wheel buttons, left
MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 7

Cruise control on/off, interrupt 110

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 8

Cruise control on/off, interrupt 116

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 9

Store speed

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 10

Resume speed 112, 117

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 11

Set speed 112, 116

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 12

Reduce distance 116

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 13

Increase distance 110

6 Steering column stalk, left

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 14

Turn signal 64

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 15

High beams, head-lamp flasher 64

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 16

Roadside parking lamps 86

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 17

Computer 79

7 Instrument cluster 71

8 Steering column stalk, right

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 18

Windshield wipers 64

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 19

Rain sensor 65

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 20

Cleaning windows 66

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 21

Rear window wiper 66

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 22

Cleaning rear window 66

9 Steering wheel buttons, right

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 23

Voice activation 26

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 24

Telephone

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 25

Confirm the selection 78

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 26

Move selection up 78

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 27

Move selection down 78

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 28

Increase volume

MINI Hardtop (2014) - VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 29

Reduce volume

10 Horn

11 Adjust the steering wheel 54

12 Unlock hood 180

ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE

Interior view of a car dashboard with numbered parts for identification and assembly reference.

1 Headliner 17
2 Hazard warning system 201

MINI Hardtop (2014) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 2

MINI Hardtop (2014) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 3

Intelligent Safety 99

3 Control Display 18
4 Radio/Multimedia
5 Glove compartment 141
6 Climate control 127
7 PD Park Distance Control 118

MINI Hardtop (2014) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 4

Rearview camera 120

Parking assistant 122

Auto Start/Stop function 61

MINI Hardtop (2014) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 5

Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 62

MINI Hardtop (2014) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 6

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 106

MINI Hardtop (2014) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 7

Head-up Display 83

8 Automatic transmission selector lever 67
Manual transmission selector lever 67
9 Controller with buttons 18
10 Parking brake 63
11 Driving Dynamics Control 108

MINI Hardtop (2014) - ALL AROUND THE CENTER CONSOLE - 8

1 Intelligent Emergency Request 201
2 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag 93
3 Reading lamps 90

4 Ambient light 90
5 Glass sunroof 45
6 Interior lamps 89

ONBOARD MONITOR

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

THE CONCEPT

The onboard monitor combines the functions of a multitude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - THE CONCEPT - 1

Using the onboard monitor during a trip

To avoid becoming distracted and posing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never attempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.

CONTROLS AT A GLANCE

Control elements
Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons and, depending on the equipment version, with touchpad

Control Display

Hints

To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions.
Do not place objects close to the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged.

Switching off

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off - 1

Press the button.

  1. "Switch off control display"

Options Switch off control display □ Center display iDrive Change profile □ Display user list at startup

Switching on

Press the controller again to switch the screen back on.

Controller with navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.

Some functions of the onboard monitor can be operated using the touchpad on the controller:

  1. Turn.

Close-up of a mechanical component with circular arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

  1. Press.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a highlighted circular button and an arrow pointing to it (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Move in four directions.

Close-up of a mechanical component with directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Buttons on controller

Press the button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu.

NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

Press the button Function

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Controller without navigation system

The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings.

  1. Turn.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular button and directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

  1. Press.

Close-up of a mechanical gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the center (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Move in two directions.

Close-up of a car gear shift knob with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Buttons on controller

Press the button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

Audio Open audio menu last listened to, switch between audio menus.

TEL Opens the Telephone menu.

BACK Open previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

OPERATING CONCEPT

Opening the main menu

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Opening the main menu - 1

Press the button.

Radio

The main menu is displayed.

All onboard monitor functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.

  1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Settings Control display Center display Time/Date Language/Units Connections ✓ Tone Speed

  1. Press the controller.

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".

Changing between panels

After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap.

▶ Move the controller to the left.

The current panel is closed and the previous panel is displayed.

The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed.

▶ Move the controller to the right.

A new panel is opened on top of the previous display.

Center display ✓ Center display Brightness - + Standard view Event view

Arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional panels can be opened.

View of an opened menu

When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu:

▶ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed.
▶ Press the menu button on the controller twice.

Opening the Options menu

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Opening the Options menu - 1

Press the button.

The "Options" menu is displayed.

Options Switch off control display ✓ Center display FM Display Owner's Manual ✓ HD Radio reception

Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

Options menu

The "Options" menu consists of various areas:

Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". This area remains unchanged.

▶ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio".

▶ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings

  1. Select a field.

  2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

Tone Treble - + Bass - + Balance L R Fader F R Volume settings Reset

  1. Press the controller.

Activating/deactivating the functions

Several menu items are preceded by a checkbox. It indicates whether the function is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function.

The function is activated.

☐ The function is deactivated.

TOUCHPAD

Some functions of the onboard monitor can be operated using the touchpad on the controller:

Selecting functions

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Touchpad"
  3. Select the desired function.

▶ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.

▶ "Interactive map": operating the interactive map.

▶ "Audio feedback": the entered letters and numbers are announced.

Entering letters and numbers

The entry of the letters requires some practice at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to the following:

For the input of upper/lower case letters and numbers, it may be necessary to switch via the controller to the corresponding Input mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical.
▶ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display.
▶ Always enter accompanying signs, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. The possibility of input depends on the set language. Where necessary, enter special characters via the controller.
To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad.
To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad.
To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the upper area of the touchpad.
To enter an underscore, slide to the right in the lower area of the touchpad.

Operating the interactive map

The interactive map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad.

Function Controls

Interactive map. Slide in the corresponding direction.

Enlarge/shrink interactive map.

Drag inwards or outwards on the touchpad with the fingers.

Display menu. Tap once.

Changing settings

Settings on the control display, such as the volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do this slide to the left or right accordingly.

EXAMPLE: SETTING THE CLOCK

Setting the clock

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Setting the clock - 1

Press the button. The main menu isayed.

  1. Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Settings

  1. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date".
  2. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller.
  3. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Time/Date Time zone UTC +01:00 Time: 13:08 Format: 24h Date: 18.02.2013 Format: tt.mm.jj

  1. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller.
  2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

STATUS INFORMATION

Status field

The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right:

Time.
▶ Current entertainment source.
▶ Sound output, on/off.
▶ Wireless network reception strength.
▶ Telephone status.
▶ Traffic bulletin reception.

Status field symbols

The symbols are grouped as follows.

Radio symbols

Symbol Meaning

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Radio symbols - 1

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 1

Incoming or outgoing call.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 2

Missed call.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 3

Wireless network reception strength.

Symbol flashes: network search.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 4

Wireless network is not available.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 5

Bluetooth is switched on.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 6

Roaming is active.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 7

Text message was received.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 8

Check the SIM card.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 9

SIM card is blocked.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 10

SIM card is missing.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Telephone symbols - 11

Enter the PIN.

Entertainment symbols

Symbol Meaning

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Entertainment symbols - 1

DVD changer.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Entertainment symbols - 2

Music collection.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Entertainment symbols - 3

note Gracenote® database.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Entertainment symbols - 4

AUX-IN port.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Entertainment symbols - 5

USB audio interface.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Entertainment symbols - 6

Mobile phone audio interface.

Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Additional symbols - 1

Spoken instructions are switched off.

SPLIT SCREEN

General information

Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the onboard computer.

In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu.

Switching the split screen on and off

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching the split screen on and off - 1

Press the button.

  1. "Split screen"

Selecting the display

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Selecting the display - 1

Press the button.

  1. "Split screen"

  2. Move the controller until the split screen is selected.

  3. Press the controller or select "Split screen content".

  4. Select the desired menu item.

Split screen content ✓ Split screen Arrow display Map facing north Map direction of travel Map perspective view Position ✓ Onboard info

PROGRAMMABLE MEMORY BUTTONS

General information

The onboard monitor functions can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the menu.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving a function

  1. Highlight function via the onboard monitor.

  2. 1...6 Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Running a function

1...6 Press the button. The function will run immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected.

Displaying the button assignment

Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects.

The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen.

Owner's Manual Quick reference Search by pictures Owner's Manual Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle status

To display short information: touch the button.
To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period.

Deleting the button assignments

  1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously for approx. five seconds.
  2. "OK"

ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS

General information

  1. Turn the controller: select letters or numbers.
  2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed.
  3. "OK": confirm the entry.

Symbol Function

← Press the controller: delete the letter or number.

← Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers.

Switching between cases, letters and numbers

Depending on the menu, you can switch between entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers:

Symbol Function

ABC Enter the letters.

1@+ Enter the numbers.

abc or ABC move the controller up.

Without navigation system

@A A a select the symbol.

Entry comparison

Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically.

The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle.

▶ Only those letters are offered during the entry for which data is available.
Destination search: town/city names can be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display.

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

THE CONCEPT

▶ Most functions that are displayed on the Control Display can be operated by spoken commands via the voice activation system. The system prompts you to make your entries.
▶ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system.
The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side.
▷ ...< Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system.

REQUIREMENTS

Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identified.

Set the language, refer to page 82.

USING VOICE ACTIVATION

Activating the voice activation system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating the voice activation system - 1

Press the button on the steering

  1. Wait for the signal.

  2. Say the command.

The command is displayed in the instrument cluster.

This symbol in the instrument cluster indicates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function in this case via the onboard monitor.

Terminating the voice activation system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Terminating the voice activation system - 1

Briefly press the button on the steering wheel or >End<.

POSSIBLE COMMANDS

Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands.

The available commands depend on which menu is currently displayed on the Control Display.

Short commands exist for many functions.

Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can also be selected via the voice activation system. Speak these list entries exactly as they are displayed in the respective list.

Having possible commands read aloud

You can have the available commands read out loud for you: >commands<

For example, if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

Executing functions using short commands

Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, nearly irrespective of which menu item is currently selected, e.g., >Vehicle status>.

Help dialog for the voice activation system

Calling up help dialog: >Help

Additional commands for the help dialog:

Help with examples<: information about the current operating options and the most important commands for them are announced.
Help voice activation: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

ONE EXAMPLE: OPEN THE TONE SETTINGS

Via the main menu

The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller.

  1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

  2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

  3. Radio menu

  4. »Audio settings«

Via short command

The desired radio station can also be started via a short command.

  1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary.

  2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

  3. Audio settings

SETTING THE VOICE DIALOG

You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version.

In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form.

On the Control Display:

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Language/Units"
  3. "Speech type:"
  4. Select the setting.

SETTING THE VOICE DIALOG LANGUAGE

You can set the language in which the voice activation and system announcements are to be made.

On the Control Display:

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Language/Units"
  3. "Speech type:"
  4. Select the desired language.

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME

Turn the volume button while giving an instruction until the desired volume is set.

The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed.
The volume is stored for the remote control currently in use.

HINTS ON EMERGENCY RE- QUESTS

Do not use the voice activation system to initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situations, the voice and vocal pitch can change.

This can unnecessarily delay the establishment of a telephone connection.

Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 201, in the vicinity of the interior mirror.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDI-TIONS

▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, emphasis, and speed.
▶ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun-roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▶ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

INTEGRATED OWNER'S MANUAL IN THE VEHICLE

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

INTEGRATED OWNER'S MANUAL IN THE VEHICLE

The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are described therein.

Components of the Integrated Owner's Manual

The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of information or access possibilities.

Quick Reference Guide

Located in the Quick Reference is important information for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving.

Search by pictures

Information and descriptions based on illustrations can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed.

Owner's Manual

Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index.

Select components

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Select components - 1

Press the button.

  1. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info".
  2. Press the controller.
  3. Selecting desired range:

▶ "Quick reference"
▶ "Search by pictures"
▶ "Owner's Manual"

Vehicle Info MINIMALISM Quick reference Search by pictures Owner's Manual Onboard info Trip computer Vehicle status

Leafing through the Owner's Manual

Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed.

Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links.

Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Page by page without link access - 1

Leaf back.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Page by page without link access - 2

Leaf forward.

Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function

The relevant information can be opened directly.

Opening via the onboard monitor

To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu:

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Opening via the onboard monitor - 1

  1. ☐ Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

  2. "Display Owner's Manual"

Opening when a Check Control message is displayed

Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display:

"Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual

To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays:

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual - 1

  1. Press the button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed.

  2. "Display Owner's Manual"

  3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual - 2

  1. ☐ Press the button again to return to the function displayed last.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual - 3

  1. ☐ Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last.

To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information

The Owner's Manual can be stored on the programmable memory buttons and called up directly.

Storing

  1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive.

  2. 1...6 Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds.

Executing

1...6 Press the button. The Owner's Man

The Owner's Manual is displayed immediately.

| Category | Value | | -------- | ----- | | Category1 | 100 | | Category2 | 100 | | Category3 | 100 | | Category4 | 100 | | Category5 | 100 | | Category6 | 100 | | Category7 | 100 | | Category8 | 100 | | Category9 | 100 | | Category10 | 100 | | Category11 | 100 | | Category12 | 100 | | Category13 |…

A OFF START ENGINE STOP 22 OFF

HANDLE ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

OPENING AND CLOSING

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

REMOTE CONTROL/KEY

General information

The vehicle is supplied with two remote controls with integrated keys.

Every remote control contains a replaceable battery.

Depending on the equipment package and country-specific variant, the functions of the keys can be set. Settings, refer to page 42.

For every remote control, personal settings are stored in the vehicle. Personal Profile, refer to page 35.

Information on the required maintenance is stored in the remote controls. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 186

At a glance

1 2 3 4

1 Unlocking

2 Locking

3 Unlock the tailgate

4 Panic mode

Integrated key

1 2 MINI

Press the button on the remote control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2.

The integrated key fits the driver's door lock.

Replacing the battery

  1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control.

  2. Slide the key into the opening and raise the cover, arrow.

The battery compartment is accessible.

3D rendered illustration of a mechanical component with a handle and arrow, no visible text or symbols

  1. Slide the key in the cover of the battery compartment and raise the cover, arrow.

Cross-sectional diagram of a mechanical device with a lever and housing, showing internal components (no text or labels)

  1. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards.

  2. Insert cap and cover.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Replacing the battery - 3

Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.

New remote controls

New remote controls are available from the service center.

Loss of the remote controls

Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center.

Emergency detection of remote control

It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following:

▶ Interference of radio transmission to remote control by external sources, e.g. by radio masts.
▶ Discharged battery in the remote control.
▶ Interference of radio transmission by mobile devices in close proximity to the remote control.
▶ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mobile devices in the vehicle.

A Check Control message is displayed if an attempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Starting the engine via emergency detection of the remote control

Close-up of a car interior showing steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Automatic transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake.

Manual transmission: if a corresponding Check Control message appears, hold the remote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the clutch.

PERSONAL PROFILE

The concept

Individual settings in the vehicle are saved in personal profiles. Every remote control is assigned a profile.

  • Three personal profiles and a guest profile can be created.
    ▶ Changes to the settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated.
    During unlocking, the profile stored for the remote control is activated.
    ▶ Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been operated in the meantime with another remote control.

Adjusting

The following settings are stored in a profile.

▶ Radio: stored stations, station listened to last.
▶ Assignment of the programmable memory buttons.
▶ Tone settings.
▶ Audio source listened to last.
▶ Unlocking the vehicle: driver door or entire vehicle.
▶ Locking the vehicle: if no door is open or after starting off.
▶ Welcome lamps: on/off.
▶ Triple turn signal activation: on/off.
▶ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time setting.
▷ Language on the Control Display.
Daytime running lights: on/off.
▶ Air conditioner/Automatic climate control: settings.
▶ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice output on/off.
▶ Park Distance Control PDC: signal tone volume.
▶ Rearview camera: selection of functions and type of display.
▶ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, position and rotation of the display.
▶ Driving Dynamics Control: configuration.

Profile management

Opening the profiles

A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control currently in use.

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Profiles"
  3. Select a profile.

Called up profile is assigned to the remote control being used at the time.

Renaming profiles

  1. 'Settings'
  2. "Profiles"
    The current profile is selected.

  3. Open "Options".

  4. "Rename current profile"

Resetting profiles

The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values.

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Profiles"
    The current profile is selected.

  3. Open "Options".

  4. "Reset current profile"

Importing profiles

Profiles stored on a USB device can be im- ported via the USB interface.

Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile.

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Profiles"
  3. "Import profile"
  4. "USB device"

Exporting profiles

Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported.

This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop for example. The saved profiles can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Profile function.

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Profiles"

  3. "Export profile"

  4. "USB device"

Using the guest profile

The guest profile can be used to make individual settings that are saved in none of the three personal profiles.

This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Profiles"
  3. Open "Guest".
  4. Adjust the settings.

The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not assigned to the current remote control.

Display profile list during start

The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile.

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Profiles"
  3. Open "Options".
  4. "Display user list at startup"

OPENING AND CLOSING

Using the remote control

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Take the remote control with you

People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the inside. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.

Unlocking

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Unlocking - 1

Press the button on the remote control.

The vehicle is unlocked.

Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy lamps are switched on.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Unlocking - 2

Press the button on the remote control twice.

When the door is opened, the window is lowered to make it easier to enter the vehicle.

Depending on the equipment version and country variant, you can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. Settings, refer to page 42.

The alarm system, refer to page 42, is disarmed.

Convenient opening

The remote control can be used to open the windows and the glass sunroof after unlocking.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Convenient opening - 1

Press and hold the button on the remote control.

Releasing the button stops the motion.

Locking

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Locking - 1

Press the button on the remote control.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Locking - 2

Locking from the outside

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.

The alarm system, refer to page 42, is armed.

Switching on interior lamps and courtesy lamps

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on interior lamps and courtesy lamps - 1

Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked.

If the button is pressed within 10 seconds of when the vehicle was locked Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-theft warning system, refer to page 43, are switched off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing the button again.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Panic mode - 1

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Unlock the tailgate

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Unlock the tailgate - 1

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

The tailgate opens a little, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked.

Depending on the version and the country variant, it is possible to set whether the doors are also unlocked. Settings, refer to page 42.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Unlock the tailgate - 2

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.

The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Unlock the tailgate - 3

Provide edge protection

Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protection.

Malfunction

If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interference from external sources such as mobile

phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc.

If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at the door lock using the integrated key.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:

FCC ID:

▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
MYTCAS4.

Compliance statement:

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Without remote control

From the outside

MINI Hardtop (2014) - From the outside - 1

Locking from the outside

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.

Close-up of a car door handle with a white arrow pointing to the handle area (no text or symbols visible)

Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key.

To do this, unlock the cap from below with the integrated key, arrow, and remove.

The state of the driver's door, tailgate and fuel filler flap does not change.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - From the outside - 3

Remove the key before pulling the door handle

Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and the key.

Alarm system

The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the integrated key.

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle was unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control.

From the inside

Locking and unlocking

Close-up of a car's head panel with a circular dial indicator showing '6' and '8', no readable text or symbols beyond the dial.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Locking and unlocking - 2

Press the button.

The doors and the tailgate are locked.

The fuel filler flap is not locked.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Locking and unlocking - 3

Press the button.

The doors and the tailgate are un-

locked.

In the event of an accident of corresponding severity, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on.

Unlocking and opening

Either unlock the doors together using the central locking system buttons and then pull the door handle above the armrest or pull the door handle on the door to be opened. The other doors remain locked.

When there is an electrical defect

From the inside

Lock the doors via the door locking knobs.

Unlock and open the doors using the door un-locking handle.

Unlock the fuel filler flap via emergency unlocking. The state of the tailgate cannot be changed in this case.

From the outside

Lock and unlock the driver's door lock using the integrated key.

TAILGATE

Opening

When the tailgate is opened, make sure there is sufficient clearance to prevent damage.

Close-up of a car's rear bumper with a white arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols visible)

▷ Unlock the vehicle and press the button on the tailgate.

▶ Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the version and the country variant, it is possible to set whether the doors are also unlocked. Settings, refer to page 42.

The tailgate opens somewhat.

Pull the tailgate up to open.

Closing

Top-down view of a transparent plastic container with internal components (no visible text or symbols)

Recessed grips on the inside trim of the tailgate can be used to conveniently pull down the tailgate.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing - 2

Keep the closing path clear

Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing - 3

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re-

mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing - 4

Provide edge protection

Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protection.

COMFORT ACCESS

The concept

The vehicle can be accessed without activating the remote control.

All you need to do is to have the remote control with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket.

The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment.

Comfort Access supports the following functions:

▶ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▶ Unlocking of the tailgate separately.
▷ Start the engine.

Functional requirements

There are no sources of interference nearby.
To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle.
The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
The engine can only be started if the remote control is in the vehicle.

Unlocking

Close-up of a car door handle with an arrow pointing to the handle area (no text or symbols visible)

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button, arrow.

This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: 🔒

Locking

Close-up of a car door handle with an arrow pointing to the handle area (no text or symbols visible)

On the driver's or front passenger's door handle, press the button, arrow.

This corresponds to pressing the remote control button:

To save battery power, ensure that all power consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.

Convenient closing

Close-up of a car door handle with a white arrow pointing to the handle area (no text or symbols)

Press and hold down the handle of the driver or the front seat passenger.

This corresponds to pressing the remote control button:

In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Convenient closing - 2

Monitor the closing process

Monitor the closing process to ensure

that no one becomes trapped.

Unlock the tailgate

Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate.

This corresponds to pressing the remote control button: 📄

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Unlock the tailgate - 1

Do not place the remote control in the cargo area

Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the remote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.

Malfunction

Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc.

In this case, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock.

ADJUSTING

Unlocking

The settings are saved in the active profile. Personal Profile, refer to page 35.

Doors

  1. "settings"

  2. "Doors/key"

  3. Select the symbol.

  4. Select the desired function.

▶ "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-locks the entire vehicle.

▶ "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked.

▶ "Comfort access" The entire vehicle is unlocked. Pressing again lowers the window when the door is subsequently opened.

Tailgate

Depending on the equipment version and country variant, this setting is not offered in some cases.

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Doors/key"

  3. Select the symbol.

  4. Select the desired function.

▶ "Tailgate" Only the tailgate is unlocked.

▶ "Tailgate + door(s)" The tailgate and the doors are unlocked.

Locking

The settings are saved in the active profile. Personal Profile, refer to page 35.

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Doors/key"

  3. Select the desired setting.

- "Lock if no door is opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened. - "Lock after start driving" The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Doors/key"

  3. Select the desired setting.

- "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" The unlocking is acknowledged by one honk of the horn. - "Flash when lock/unlock" The unlocking is acknowledged by two flashes, the locking by one.

ALARM SYSTEM

The concept

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system responds to:

▶ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate.

▶ Movements in the vehicle.

Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during attempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car.

▶ Interruptions in battery voltage.

The alarm system briefly indicates tampering:

Acoustic alarm.

▶ By switching on the hazard warning system.
▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.

Arming and disarming the alarm system

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Access at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

Door lock and armed alarm system

The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock.

In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the ignition, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control.

Tailgate and armed alarm system

The tailgate can be opened with the remote control even when the alarm system is armed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Tailgate and armed alarm system - 1

Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second.

Depending on the version and the country variant, it is possible to set whether the doors are also unlocked. Settings, refer to page 42.

The tailgate is somewhat raised.

If the doors were also unlocked with the tailgate, the alarm system is disarmed.

After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again if the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Panic mode - 1

Press the button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror

3D rendered diagram of a mechanical component with an arrow pointing to a central feature (no text or symbols)

The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

The system is armed.

▷ Indicator lamp flashes for 10 seconds after locking, then flashes every 2 seconds:

Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctly closed. Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.

The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:

The vehicle has not been tampered with.

The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes:

An alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations:

▷ In automatic car washes.
In duplex garages.
During transport on car-carrying trains, at sea or on a trailer.
▶ When animals are to remain in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor - 1

Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 seconds and then continues to flash.

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Switching off the alarm

Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.

With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the remote control with you, press the button on the driver side or front passenger side door handle.

POWER WINDOWS

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when

leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the power windows and injure themselves.

Close-up of a black electronic device control panel with buttons and lens (no visible text or symbols)

Opening

Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held.

Press the switch beyond the resistance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing again stops the motion.

Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via the remote control.

Closing

Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically. Pulling again stops the motion.

Pinch protection system

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted.

The window reopens slightly.

Danger of pinching even with pinch protection

Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Pinch protection system - 1

No window accessories

Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.

Closing without the pinch protection system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing without the pinch protection system - 1

Keep the closing path clear

Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows:

  1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

  1. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without pinch protection.

PANORAMIC GLASS SUN-ROOF

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Keep the closing path clear

Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot operate the roof and injure themselves.

At a glance

Top-down view of a car dashboard with two illuminated buttons and control knobs (no visible text or symbols)

Tilting the glass sunroof

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Tilting the glass sunroof - 1

▶ Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is raised as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the highest position.

▶ Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is raised and stops in the highest position.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Opening glass sunroof

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Opening glass sunroof - 1

When the glass sunroof is closed:

▷ Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

▶ Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is completely opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised:

▶ Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is opened as long as the switch is pressed.

▶ Press the switch back beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass roof is completely opened.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Closing glass sunroof

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing glass sunroof - 1

With the glass sunroof open:

▶ Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed and stops in the raised position.

▶ Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed and stops in the raised position.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

▶ Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and hold it.

The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed.

▶ Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it twice.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

With the glass sunroof completely raised:

▶ Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold.

The glass sunroof is closed as long as the switch is pressed.

▶ Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and release it.

The glass sunroof is closed.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Pinch protection system

If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a glass sunroof closes, the closing action is interrupted.

The glass sunroof opens again slightly.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Pinch protection system - 1

Danger of pinching even with pinch protection

Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.

Closing without the pinch protection system

For example, if there is an external danger, proceed as follows:

  1. Press the switch forward beyond the resistance point and hold.

Pinch protection is limited and the roof re-opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

  1. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Initializing after a power failure

After a power failure, it may be the case that the roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized in this case. MINI recommends having this work performed by your service center.

ADJUSTING

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

SITTING SAFELY

The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with:

▶ Safety belts, refer to page 49.
▶ Head restraints, refer to page 50.
Airbags, refer to page 91.

SEATS

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Do not adjust the seat while driving

Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear

Also on the front passenger side, do not incline the backrest on the front passenger side too far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.

Adjusting seats

At a glance

Diagram of car seat components with numbered labels pointing to different parts

1 Forward/backward
2 Thigh support
3 Height
4 Backrest tilt

Forward/backward

Interior view of a car seatbelt with a white arrow pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction.

After releasing the lever, move the seat forward or back slightly to make sure it engages properly.

Height

Close-up of a car interior showing a vehicle wheel and dashboard with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as needed to reach the desired height.

Backrest tilt

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard with an upward arrow (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary.

Lumbar support

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture.

Close-up of a car's wheel and dashboard with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Turn the wheel in order to strengthen or weaken the curvature.

Thigh support

Close-up of a car engine compartment with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support.

Entering the rear

Note

Folding back and locking the backrest Before driving away, fold back and lock the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat movement may cause an accident.

Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people can be injured or objects damaged.

Fold down seat back

  1. Pull lever up to the stop.

Interior view of a car showing the seatbelt and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Fold backrest forward.
  2. Push the seat forward.

Original position

The driver's seat contains a mechanical memory function for forward/aft and backrest adjustment.

  1. Push the seat back into the original position.
  2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.

If the backrest is folded back when the seat is not yet in the original position, the seat latches in the current position. In this case, manually adjust longitudinal direction, refer to page 47.

Front seat heating
Close-up of a car dashboard with three circular gauges and a control panel (no readable text or symbols)

Switching on

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on - 1

Press the button once for each temperature level.

The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit.

If the drive is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automatically with the temperature selected last.

When Green mode, refer to page 156, is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Switching off

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off - 1

Press the button longer.

The LEDs go out.

SAFETY BELTS

Seats with safety belt

The vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

Number of safety belts

Your vehicle has been fitted with four safety belts for the safety of you and your passengers. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.

Hints

Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away.

To protect the occupants, the belt locking triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it.

Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

One person per safety belt

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Putting on the belt

Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen.

The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable objects, or be pinched.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 3

Reduction of restraining effect

Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed;

otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the restraining effect reduced.

Buckling the belt

Close-up of a car seatbelt mechanism with a white arrow pointing to the side arm (no text or symbols visible)

Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Unbuckling the belt

  1. Hold the belt firmly.
  2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
  3. Guide the belt back into its reel.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat - 1

The indicator lamp lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The

safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat.

Damage to safety belts

In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage:

Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Damage to safety belts - 1

Checking and replacing safety belts

Have the work performed only by your

service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.

FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS

Correctly adjusted head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Correctly adjusted head restraint - 1

Adjusting the head restraint

Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Distance

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

If necessary, adjust the distance by adjusting the tilt of the backrest.

Adjusting the height

Interior view of a car showing a white seat with directional arrows indicating flow or movement (no text or symbols)

To raise: pull.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Interior view of a car showing a white vehicle headrest with directional arrows indicating movement or flow (no text or symbols)

  1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible.
  2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

To remove the headrest, fold the backrest rearward if it is in the upright position.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Removing - 2

Before transporting passengers

Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the protective function of the head restraint is unavailable.

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS

Correctly adjusted head restraint

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Correctly adjusted head restraint - 1

Adjusting the head restraint

Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Height

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level.

Adjusting the height

Mechanical component diagram showing a piston-like shaft and housing with directional arrows indicating motion (no text or symbols)

To raise: pull.
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down.

Folding down head restraints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Folding down head restraints - 1

Extending/retracting head restraint

Only fold down head restraint if no passengers are in the rear. Fold out retracted headrests again if passengers are being carried in the rear; otherwise, there is increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

Interior view of a car showing a white helmet with directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

To lower flaps: press the button, arrow 1, and press down the head restraint.
▶ Fold back up: pull up head restraints.

Removing

Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question.

Fold the seat down, refer to page 139, before removing the head restraint, otherwise the head restraint cannot be removed.

Mechanical component diagram showing a curved housing with directional arrows and a numbered label (1), no readable text or symbols present.

  1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible.

  2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Removing - 2

Before transporting passengers

Reinstall the head restraint before transporting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the protective function of the head restraint is unavailable.

MIRRORS

Exterior mirrors

At a glance

Technical diagram of a mechanical component with numbered parts labeled 1, 2, and 3

1 Adjusting

2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor

3 Fold in and out

General information

The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 1

Estimating distances correctly

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the mirror setting is stored for the remote control in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the setting for this function is active.

Selecting a mirror

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Selecting a mirror - 1

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch.

Adjusting electrically

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Adjusting electrically - 1

The setting corresponds to the direction in which the button is pressed.

Adjusting manually

If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass.

Automatic Curb Monitor

When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front passenger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, for example.

Activating

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating - 1

  1. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position.

  2. Engage transmission position R.

Deactivating

Slide the mirror changeover switch to the passenger side mirror position.

Fold in and out

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Fold in and out - 1

Press the button.

Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h.

For example, this is advantageous

In car washes.

In narrow streets.

▶ For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually.

Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx.

25 mph/40 km/h.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Fold in and out - 2

Fold in the mirror in a car wash

Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature

Both exterior mirrors are automatically dimmed. Photocells are used for control in the Interior rearview mirror, refer to page 53.

Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable

Flip lever
Diagram of a mechanical component with two upward arrows indicating motion or force, no text or symbols present

To reduce the blinding effect of the interior rear view mirror, flip the lever forward.

Turn knob
3D rendered diagram of a bowl with a central knob and directional arrows indicating rotation or movement (no text or symbols)

Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by the interior mirror.

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature

The concept
Diagram showing two views of a device with arrows pointing to features, no text or symbols present

Photocells are used for control:

▷ In the mirror glass.
On the back of the mirror.

Functional requirement

For proper operation:

▷ Keep the photocells clean.
Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield.

STEERING WHEEL

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Do not adjust while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.

Adjusting

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Switch on the ignition.
  2. Fold the lever down.
  3. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating position.
  4. Fold the lever back.
  5. Switch off the ignition again if necessary.

TRANSPORTING CHILDREN SAFELY

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

THE RIGHT PLACE FOR CHILDREN

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Children in the vehicle

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger themselves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.

Children should always be in the rear

Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Children should always be in the rear - 1

Transporting children in the rear

Only transport children younger than

13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems provided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in an accident.

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.

Children on the front passenger seat

Should it ever be necessary to use a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 93.

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Deactivated front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in front passenger seat, the front passenger gts must be deactivated; otherwise, there increased risk of injury to the child when rbags are triggered, even with a child re-t fixing system.

INSTALLING CHILD RE-STRAINT FIXING SYSTEMS

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Manufacturer's information for child re- straint fixing systems

To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the protective effect can be impaired.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Ensuring the stability of the child seat When installing child restraint fixing sys- make sure that the child seat is securely ned to the backrest of the seat. The angle the backrest may need to be adjusted and, the necessary, the headrest height may also to be adjusted, or if possible removed. sure that all backrests are securely d. Otherwise, the stability of the child seat ted, and there is an increased risk of in-

jury because of unexpected movement of the rear seat backrest.

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags

After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Deactivate the front passenger airbags automatically, refer to page 93.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Deactivating airbags - 1

Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint fixing system.

Seat position and height

Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest position to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident.

If the upper fixing point of the safety belt is located before the belt guide of the child seat, move the passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached.

Child seat security

Interior view of a car showing a car seat with driver seat and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems.

Locking the safety belt

  1. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
  2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with the belt.
  3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking the safety belt

  1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
  2. Remove the child restraint fixing system.
  3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in completely.

LATCH CHILD RESTRAINT FIXING SYSTEM

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Follow manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems

To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufacturer;

otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors

The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors - 1

Correctly engage the lower LATCH anchors

Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the back-rest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.

Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fixing system, pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system.

Position

Close-up of a car seatbelt buckle with two white buttons inserted, no text or symbols visible

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the indicated covers.

Mounting LATCH child restraint fixing systems

  1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; refer to the user's manual of the system.
  2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are properly connected.

Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Mounting eyes

Only use the mounting eyes for the upper retaining strap to secure child restraint fixing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.

Mounting points

Interior view of a car trunk with two white arrows pointing to the rear compartment (no text or symbols visible)

There are two mounting points for the upper retaining strap of LATCH child restraint fixing systems.

Retaining strap guide

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Retaining strap guide - 1

Retaining strap

Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not routed over the head restraints or sharp edges and is free of twisting on its way to the upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt cannot properly secure the child restraint fixing system in an accident.

1 2 6 3 5 4

1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint.
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Mounting point/eye
5 Seat backrest
6 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point

  1. Raise the head restraint if necessary.
  2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint.
  3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the mounting eye on the rear seat.
  4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point - 1

No persons on the back seat when there is a child restraint fixing system with an upper retaining strap on the front passenger seat.

When there is a child restraint fixing system with an upper retaining strap on the front passenger seat, no one should sit in the back seat directly behind it, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury due to the upper retaining strap.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point - 2

Upper retaining strap when the backrest is folded down

When the backrest is folded down, do not guide the belt through the head restraint supports on the backrest; otherwise the belt may not secure the child restraint fixing system properly in case of an accident.

DRIVING

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

START/STOP BUTTON

The concept

MINI Hardtop (2014) - The concept - 1

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine.

Automatic transmission: the engine starts in selector lever posi-

tion P or N if the brake pedal is pressed when you press the Start/Stop button.

Manual transmission: the engine starts if the clutch pedal is depressed when the Start/Stop button is pressed.

Ignition on

Automatic transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time.

All vehicle systems are ready for operation.

Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Note

If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on.

Ignition off

Manual-shift transmission: press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on the clutch pedal at the same time.

Automatic transmission: press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time.

All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.

To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers.

Ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped:

During locking, also with the low beams activated.
▶ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off.
When opening and closing the driver door, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off.
▶ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if the driver's door is open and the low beams are switched off.

When the ignition is switched off, by opening or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains active.

Radio ready state

Activate radio ready state:

▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button.

Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation.

Radio ready state switches off automatically:

▶ After approx. 8 minutes.
When the vehicle is locked using the central locking system.
▶ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started.

STARTING THE ENGINE

General information

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 1

Enclosed areas

Do not let the engine run in enclosed

areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 2

Unattended vehicle

Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger.

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, set the parking brake and place the transmission in selector lever position P or neutral to prevent the vehicle from moving.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 3

Repeated starting in quick succession

Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds.

Diesel engine

If the engine is cold and temperatures are below approx. 32 °F/0 °C, the start process may be delayed somewhat due to automatic preheating.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Automatic transmission

Starting the engine

  1. Depress the brake pedal.
  2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
  3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

Manual transmission

Starting the engine

  1. Depress the brake pedal.
  2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to neutral.
  3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts.

ENGINE STOP

General information

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 1

Take the remote control with you

Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for example, cannot start the engine.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 2

Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required

Set the parking brake firmly when parking; otherwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the vehicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb.

Before driving into a car wash

In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, pay attention to the information regarding Washing in automatic car washes, refer to page 207.

Automatic transmission

Switching off the engine

  1. Engage selector lever position P with the vehicle stopped.

  2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio ready state is switched on.

  1. Set the parking brake.

Manual transmission

Switching off the engine

  1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Start/Stop button.

The engine is switched off.

The radio ready state is switched on.

  1. Shift into first gear or reverse.

  2. Set the parking brake.

AUTO START/STOP FUNCTION

The concept

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic

lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off.

Automatic operation

After every start of the engine using the Start/Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in the last selected state, refer to page 63. When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it is available when the vehicle is traveling faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h.

Engine stop

The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions:

Manual transmission:

▶ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed.

The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

Automatic transmission:

The selector lever is in selector lever position D.

▶ Brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stopped.

The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

In order to be able to release the brake pedal, engage selector lever position P. The engine remains off.

To continue driving depress the brake pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine starts automatically.

The air flow of the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Displays in the instrument cluster - 1

The display indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine start.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Displays in the instrument cluster - 2

The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic engine stop have not been satisfied.

Note

The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations:

The external temperature is high and automatic climate control is running.
The passenger compartment has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level.
The engine is not yet at operating temperature.
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned.
▶ After driving in reverse.
Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.
The vehicle battery charge is very low.
The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
▶ Selector lever in selector lever position R, N or M/S.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the following conditions:

▶ Manual transmission:

The clutch pedal is pressed.

▶ Automatic transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal.

After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met.

The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.

The hood was unlocked.

Some indicator lamps light up for varying lengths of time.

The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button.

Note

Even if driving away was not intended, the deactivated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:

Excessive warming of the passenger compartment when the cooling function is switched on.

The steering wheel is turned.

▶ Automatic transmission: change from selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.

▶ Automatic transmission: change from selector lever position P to R, N, D or M/S.

The vehicle begins rolling.

Fogging of the windows when the automatic climate control is switched on.

The vehicle battery charge is very low.

Excessive cooling of the passenger compartment when the heating is switched on.

▶ Manual transmission: low brake vacuum pressure; this can occur, for example, if the brake pedal is depressed a number of times in succession.

Activating/deactivating the system manually

Using the button
Close-up of a car dashboard with four rotary switches labeled 'P1', 'Q', 'S', and 'L' (no text or symbols on the switches themselves)

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating/deactivating the system manually - 2

Press the button.

▶ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is deactivated.

The engine is started during an automatic engine stop.

The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button.

▶ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop

During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e.g., when leaving it.

  1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

  2. Set the parking brake.

Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, such as when the driver is detected to be absent.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches of the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

PARKING BRAKE

Applying

The lever automatically engages after being pulled up.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Applying - 1

The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set.

Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Applying - 2

Releasing
Mechanical assembly diagram showing a shaft inserted into a gear-like component (no text or symbols visible)

Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide the lever down.

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Use while driving

If on a rare occasion it is necessary to use the parking brake while driving, do not use excessive force when applying it. When using it, keep the button on the lever depressed.

Otherwise, using excessive force when applying the parking brake may cause the rear wheels to lock, resulting in fishtailing.

To prevent corrosion and braking control on one side only, lightly apply the parking brake

periodically while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.

The brake lamps will not light up if the parking brake is engaged.

TURN SIGNAL, HIGH BEAMS, HEADLAMP FLASHER

Turn signal

Using turn signals

Close-up of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols visible)

Press the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed.

Triple turn signal activation

Press the lever to the resistance point.

The turn signal flashes three times.

The function can be activated or deactivated:

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Lighting"

  3. "Triple turn signal"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Signaling briefly

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash.

High beams, headlamp flasher

Close-up of a car dashboard with directional arrows and labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

▷ High beams, arrow 1.

▶ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

WASHER/WIPER SYSTEM

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.

No wiper operation on dry windshield Do not use the windshield wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.

Switching on

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Press the wiper levers up.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

▶ Normal wiping speed: press up once.

The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary.

▶ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point.

The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.

Switching off and brief wipe

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no visible text or symbols)

Press the wiper levers down.

The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

▶ Brief wipe: press down once.
To switch off normal wipe: press down once.
To switch off fast wipe: press down twice.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor

The concept

Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper operation is preset.

The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the windshield, directly behind the interior rearview mirror.

Activating/deactivating

Interior view of a car dashboard with a rotary knob and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Press the button on the wiper lever.

The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wiping operation is started. If there is frost, wiper operation is not started.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating/deactivating - 2

Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of the rain sensor

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Turn the thumbwheel.

Washing the windshield

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

Pull the wiper lever.

The system sprays washer fluid on the wind-shield and activates the wipers briefly.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Washing the windshield - 2

Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; otherwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze.

Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated while the ignition is switched on.

Rear window wiper

Switching on the rear window wiper

0 1 2 3

Turn switch from idle position 0 upward, arrow 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is engaged, the system switches to continuous operation.

Cleaning rear window

In interval mode: turn the switch further, arrow 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released.

In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle position when released.

Fold-out position of the wipers

Helpful when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example.

  1. Switch the ignition on and off again.

  2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind-shield.

  3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 seconds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position.

After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Fold-out position of the wipers - 1

Fold the wipers back down

Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; otherwise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.

  1. Switch on the ignition.

  2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers move to their resting position and are ready for operation.

WASHER FLUID

General information

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 1

Antifreeze for washer fluid

Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injury if it is used incorrectly.

Therefore, keep it away from sources of ignition.

Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children.

Follow the notes and instructions on the container.

United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent.

Washer fluid reservoir

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Washer fluid reservoir - 1

Adding washer fluid

Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts.

Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.

Black and white photo of a vehicle's front view with a circular warning sign (no readable text or symbols)

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.

Fill with a mixture of windshield washer concentrate and tap water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufacturer's recommendations.

Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio.

Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system.

Do not mix window washer concentrates of different manufacturers, because otherwise it can result in clogging of the windshield washer nozzles.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Shifting - 1

Shifting into 5th or 6th gear

When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push the gearshift lever to the right; otherwise inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance move the selector lever in a dynamic movement to the left and engage the reverse gear.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WITH STEPTRONIC

Selector lever positions

D Drive, automatic position

Selector lever position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are available.

R is Reverse

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N is Neutral

Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll.

P Park

Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked.

Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selector lever position P of the automatic transmission is engaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Engaging a selector lever position

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Engaging a selector lever position - 1

Press on the brake pedal until you start driving

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.

The selector lever can only be taken out of selector lever position P if the ignition is on or the engine is running.

With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever position P or N; otherwise, the selector lever is blocked: shift lock.

A lock prevents inadvertent shifting into selector lever position P or R.

Canceling the lock

Mechanical gear shift lever assembly showing hub, shaft, and gear (no text or symbols visible)

Press the button on the front of the selector lever, arrow.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Activating the sport program

Mechanical gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols visible)

Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D.

The engaged selector lever position, such as S1, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

The sport program of the transmission is activated.

Activating the M/S manual mode

  1. Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D.

  2. Push the selector lever forward or backward.

Manual mode becomes active and the selector lever position is changed.

The engaged selector lever position is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1.

Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

Switching to manual mode

To shift down: press the selector lever forward.

To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards.

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

The selected selector lever position is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current one.

Manual mode M/S: prevent automatic upshifting

Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed.

For vehicles with Sport automatic transmission, automatic shift operations are not performed if one of the following conditions is met:

▷ DSC is deactivated.

▶ TRACTION is activated.

In addition, the kickdown is deactivated.

Ending the sport program/manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.

D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles for Sport automatic transmission

Interior view of a car dashboard with the Mini logo and directional arrows indicating steering wheel (no text or symbols beyond branding)

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode.

If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle is not accelerated for a certain time, the system switches back into automatic mode if the selector lever is in selector lever position D.

▶ Shift up: pull right shift paddle.
▶ Shift down: pull left shift paddle.

The vehicle only shifts up or down at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., it does not shift down if the engine speed is too high.

The selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

Displays in the instrument cluster

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Displays in the instrument cluster - 1

The selector lever position is displayed, e.g.: P.

Manually release the transmission lock

Should the selector lever be blocked in selector lever position P despite the ignition being turned on, the brake being depressed and the unlock button being pressed, the transmission lock can be manually canceled:

Before unlocking the transmission lock manually, engage the parking brake forcefully to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

  1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
  2. Pull the sleeve over the selector lever. Unplug the cable connector if necessary.
  3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 188, press the yellow release lever downward, arrow.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular dial and internal structure, no visible text or symbols

  1. Move the selector lever slightly toward the rear; to do this press the unlock button on the front of the selector lever.

Release the release lever.

  1. Bring the selector lever into the desired position.

Sport automatic transmission: Launch Control

The concept

Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction.

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Component wear

Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.

Did not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 148, period.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode, refer to page 106.

Requirements

Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km.

To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel.

Start with launch control

While the engine is running:

1.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - 1. - 1

utton and select with the

Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 108, Sport+.

In the instrument cluster, TRACTION is displayed in combination with SPORT. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up.

  1. Engage selector lever position S.

  2. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.

  3. Press on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
  4. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake.

Before using Launch Control, allow the transmission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.

DISPLAYS

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Overview, instrument cluster
1 2 3 2 4 READY OFF 6 5

1 Tachometer 74
2 Indicator/warning lamps 72
3 Speedometer

4 Fuel gauge 74
5 Display/reset miles 74
6 Electronic displays 72

Electronic displays

1 2 3

1 Driver assistance systems

Messages, e.g. Check Control

Time 75

External temperature 75

Selection lists 78

Miles/trip miles 74

Computer 79

2 Selector lever position display 67

Gear shift indicator 76

3 Driving Dynamics Control 108

Status

CHECK CONTROL

The concept

The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.

A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Display.

Indicator/warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.

Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Overview: indicator/warning lamps

Symbol Function or system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Overview: indicator/warning lamps - 1

Turn signal

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Overview: indicator/warning lamps - 2

Front fog lamps

Symbol Function or system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 1

Rear fog lamp

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 2

High beams

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 3

High-beam Assistant

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 4

Parking lamps, headlamp control

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 5

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control: collision warning.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 6

Cruise control

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 7

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 8

DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 9

Tire Pressure Monitor

Flat Tire Monitor

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 10

Safety belts

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 11

Airbag system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 12

Steering system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 13

Engine functions

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 14

Parking brake.

Brake system.

Symbol Function or system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 1

In Canadian models

Parking brake.

Brake system.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 2

ABS Antilock Brake System

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 3

In Canadian models

ABS Antilock Brake System

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Function or system - 4

At least one Check Control message is displayed or is stored (symbol in display)

Text messages

Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps.

Supplementary text messages

Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control.

The supplementary text of urgent messages is automatically displayed on the Control Display.

Symbols

Within the supplementary text, the following functions can be selected independent of the check control message.

▶ Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual.
Service request"

Contact the service partner.

Roadside Assistance"

Contact Roadside Assistance.

Hiding Check Control messages

Close-up of a car interior showing a white lever shift knob with a black arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols visible)

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If several malfunctions occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically.

▶ Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Check Control"
  4. Select the text message.

Messages after trip completion

Special messages that are displayed during driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off.

FUEL GAUGE

MINI Hardtop (2014) - FUEL GAUGE - 1

The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.

The arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on.

Hints on refueling, refer to page 164.

TACHOMETER

Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.

ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE

If the engine oil along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.

COOLANT TEMPERATURE

If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. Check the coolant level, refer to page 185.

ODOMETER AND TRIP ODOMETER

The concept

Odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Resetting the trip odometer

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Resetting the trip odometer - 1

Press the knob.

The odometer is displayed when the ignition is switched off.

▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset.

EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE

MINI Hardtop (2014) - EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE - 1

If the indicator drops to +37 °F/+3 °C, a signal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice

on roads.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE - 2

Ice on roads

Even at temperatures above

+37 °F/+3 °C, there can be a risk of ice on roads.

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example, to avoid the increased risk of an accident.

TIME

MINI Hardtop (2014) - TIME - 1

The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Setting the time on the Control Display, refer to page 81.

DATE

MINI Hardtop (2014) - DATE - 1

The date is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Set the date on the Control Display, refer to page 82.

RANGE

Display

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Display - 1

After the reserve range is reached:

▶ A Check Control message is displayed briefly.
The remaining range is shown on the onboard computer.

When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when cornering quickly, operation of the engine is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Display - 2

Refuel promptly

Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.

Displaying the cruising range

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Instr. cluster display"
  3. "Range"

CURRENT FUEL CONSUMPTION

The concept

Displays the current fuel consumption. You can check whether you are currently driving in an efficient and environmentally-friendly manner.

Displaying the current fuel consumption

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Instr. cluster display"
  3. "Current consumption"

SERVICE REQUIREMENTS

The concept

The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in the instrument cluster after the ignition is switched on.

The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist.

Display

Detailed information on service requirements

More information on the scope of service required can be displayed on the Control Display.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Service required"

Required maintenance procedures and legally mandated inspections are displayed.

  1. Select an entry to call up detailed information.

Symbols

Symbols Description

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbols Description - 1

No service is currently required.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbols Description - 2

The deadline for scheduled maintenance or a legally mandated inspection is approaching.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbols Description - 3

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering appointment dates

Enter the dates for the required inspections.

Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Service required"
  4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
  5. "Date:"
  6. Adjust the settings.
  7. Confirm.

The entered date is stored.

GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR

The concept

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and the country-specific version of the vehicle, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the automatic transmission and in the manual transmission.

The system recommends the most fuel efficient gear for the current driving situation.

Displays

Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Example Description

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Example Description - 1

Fuel efficient gear is engaged.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Example Description - 2

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

SPEED LIMIT DETECTION WITH NO PASSING INFORMA- TION

The concept

Speed limit detection

Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected and compared with vehicle interior data, such as for the rain sensor, and are displayed depending on the situation.

With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the navigation data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs.

Without a navigation system, the system is subject to limitations imposed by technology. Speed limits with extra text characters are always displayed.

No Passing Information

No Passing Information in the instrument cluster displays the beginnings and ends of no passing zones detected by the camera. The system accounts for only the beginnings and ends of No Passing zones marked by signs.

No display is shown:

In countries where No Passing zones are primarily identified with road markings.

On routes without signage.

Where there are railroad crossings, highway markings or other situations where no signage is present, but passing would not be permitted.

Hints

Speed limits and no passing zones when towing a trailer are not shown.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Personal judgment

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.

The system assists the driver and does not replace the human eye.

At a glance

Camera

Front view of a car with a white upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is located near the base of the mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Instr. cluster display"
  3. "Speed limit information"

If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instrument cluster via the onboard computer.

No Passing Information is displayed together with the activated speed limit information.

Display

The following is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Speed limit detection

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Speed limit detection - 1

The last speed limit detected. Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out after curves or longer stretches of roadway.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Speed limit detection - 2

With navigation system: speed limit detection is not available.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Speed limit detection - 3

Without navigation system: speed limit detection switched on, but no speed limit or cancellation is detected.

Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

No Passing Information

MINI Hardtop (2014) - No Passing Information - 1

▶ Start of No Passing zone.
▷ End of No Passing zone.
▶ No Passing Information not available.

No Passing Information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

System limits

The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

▶ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
▶ When driving toward bright lights.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a sticker, etc.

In the event of incorrect detection by the camera.
▶ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect.
▶ In areas not covered by the navigation system.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in the road network.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker.
▶ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.

SELECTION LISTS IN THE IN-STRUMENT CLUSTER

The concept

The following can be displayed or operated using the buttons on the steering wheel and the display in the instrument cluster:

▶ Current audio source.
▶ Redial on telephone.
▶ Activation of the voice activation system.
In addition, programs of the Driving Dynamics Control are displayed.

Display

D BAYERN 3

Activating a list and adjusting the setting

Button the steering wheel Function
MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating a list and adjusting the setting - 1

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating a list and adjusting the setting - 2

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating a list and adjusting the setting - 3

Activate the corresponding list, and select the desired setting.

Confirm the selection.

COMPUTER

Calling up information on the info display

Close-up of a car interior showing a white circular brush tool inserted into the intake compartment, with no visible text or symbols.

Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

Information at a glance

Info display

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Info display - 1

Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information on the info display:

▷ Range.

▷ GREEN Info.

When GREEN Mode is activated.

▶ Average fuel consumption.

▶ Current fuel consumption.
▷ Average speed.
Date.
▶ Engine temperature display.
▷ Distance to destination.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

▶ Time of arrival.

When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system.

▶ Speed limit detection.
▷ Speed.

Adjusting the info display

You can select what information from the on-board computer is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster.

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Instr. cluster display"
  3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range

Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel.

It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km.

GREEN info

Description of GREEN info, refer to page 158.

Average fuel consumption

This is calculated for the period during which the engine is running.

The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the onboard computer.

Average speed

Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

Resetting average values

Press and hold the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever.

Distance to destination

The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.

The distance to the destination is adopted automatically.

Time of arrival

The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is entered in the navigation system before the trip is started.

The time must be correctly set.

Speed limit detection

Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 77, function.

Trip computer

The vehicle features two types of computer.

▶ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary.
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip.

Resetting the trip computer

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Trip computer"
  3. "Reset": all values are reset.

"Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill.

Display on the Control Display

Display the onboard computer or trip computer on the Control Display.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption and speed

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Onboard info"
  3. "Consumpt." or "Speed"
  4. "Yes"

DRIVING EXCITEMENT

The concept

On the Control Display, sport instruments can be displayed, and the vehicle condition can be checked before the use of the SPORT program.

Sport instruments

On the Control Display, values for power and torque are displayed.

Displaying sport instruments

Via onboard monitor:

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Driving Excitement"
  3. Sports instruments"

Via the Driving Dynamics Control

  1. Activating SPORT.
  2. Driving Excitement"
  3. Sports instruments"

Vehicle state

The following vehicle and surrounding area data are automatically checked and evaluated in succession:

Range.

▶ Engine temperature.
▶ External temperature.
▶ SPORT program state.

Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle state is displayed.

Checking vehicle state

Via onboard monitor:

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Driving Excitement"
  3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

Via the Driving Dynamics Control

  1. Activating SPORT.
  2. "Driving Excitement"
  3. "Vehicle and surroundings"

SPEED WARNING

The concept

Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued.

The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing the limit

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Speed"
  3. "Warning at:"
  4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed.
  5. Press the controller.

The speed limit is stored.

Activating/deactivating the limit

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Speed"

  3. "Warning"

  4. Press the controller.

Setting your current speed as the limit

  1. 'Settings'
  2. "Speed"
  3. "Select current speed"
  4. Press the controller.

The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit.

SETTINGS ON THE CONTROL DISPLAY

Time

Setting the time zone

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Time/Date"
  3. "Time zone"
  4. Select the desired time zone.

The time zone is stored.

Setting the time

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Time/Date"
  3. "Time:"
  4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed.
  5. Press the controller.
  6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes are displayed.
  7. Press the controller.

The time is stored.

Setting the time format

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Time/Date"

  3. "Format:"

  4. Select the desired format.

The time format is stored.

Date

Setting the date

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Time/Date"

  3. "Date:"

  4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed.

  5. Press the controller.

  6. Make the necessary settings for the month and year.

The date is stored.

Setting the date format

  1. 🔔 "Settings"

  2. "Time/Date"

  3. "Format:"

  4. Select the desired format.

The date format is stored.

Language

Setting the language

To set the language on the Control Display:

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Language/Units"

  3. "Language:"

  4. Select the desired language.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog

Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 27.

Setting the voice activation language

Input language for the voice activation system, refer to page 27.

Units of measure

Setting the units of measure

To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature:

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Language/Units"

  3. Select the desired menu item.

  4. Select the desired unit.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness

Setting the brightness

To set the brightness of the Control Display:

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Control display"

  3. "Brightness"

  4. Turn the controller until the desired brightness is set.

  5. Press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

LED RING ON THE CENTRAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

The concept

The LED ring displays light animations to represent specific functions.

Basic displays

Basic functions, for example the tachometer, can be set to be displayed continually if desired.

Event displays

Functions that are only displayed temporarily, for example the volume or temperature settings, can be set as event displays.

Several vehicle assistance functions can also be displayed on the LED ring. The display here corresponds to the displays of the function in the respective display.

Example: tachometer

Like the tachometer in the instrument cluster, the light animations of the tachometer basic display show the current RPMs and the warning field of the permitted RPM range.

Display
1 2 3

▶ Arrow 1: current RPM.
▶ Arrow 2: prewarning field.
▶ Arrow 3: warning field.

Switching on/off LED ring

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Center Instrument"
  3. "Center Instrument"

Adjusting the LED ring

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Center Instrument"

  3. "Basic display" or "Event display"

  4. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness

The brightness can be adjusted when night lighting is active in the instrument cluster.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Center Instrument"
  3. "Brightness"
  4. Turn the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

HEAD-UP DISPLAY

The concept
Close-up of a car's wheel rim and top component (no visible text or symbols)

This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed.

The driver can quickly absorb information and concentrate on the traffic situation.

Hints

Do not move the moving parts manually Do not move the moving parts manually, and keep the area of movement of these parts clear; otherwise, the system is damaged.

Do not place objects on the Head-up Display

Do not place any objects on the Head-up Display, attach them to components of the system

or insert them in the system, or else the system can be damaged.

Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-up Display, refer to page 210.

Display visibility

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following factors:

▶ Certain sitting positions.
▶ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▶ Unfavorable light conditions.

Switching on/off

When switching on, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is extended. When switching off, the projection lens of the Head-up Display is retracted again.

Close-up of a car dashboard with multiple switches and a central 'START STOP' button (no readable text or symbols beyond basic labels)

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on/off - 2
Press the button.

Display

Overview

▷ Speed.
▶ Navigation system.
▶ Check Control messages.
Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▶ Speed limit detection.
▶ Driver assistance systems.

Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed.

Selecting displays in the Head-up Display

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Head-Up Display"
  3. "Displayed information"
  4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light.

The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Head-Up Display"

  3. "Brightness"

  4. Turn the controller.

When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be additionally influenced using the instrument lighting, refer to page 89.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Adjusting the height

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Head-Up Display"
  3. "Height"
  4. Turn the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Setting the rotation

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Head-Up Display"

  3. "Rotation"

  4. Turn the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

LAMPS

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

AT A GLANCE
3 4 5 6 0 D 2 1 7

1 Rear fog lamps
2 Front fog lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control, cornering lamps, High-beam Assistant, welcome lamps, daytime running lights
4 Lamps off, daytime running lights
5 Parking lamps/daytime running lights
6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam Assistant
7 Instrument lighting

PARKING LAMPS, CORNERING LAMPS AND ROADSIDE PARKING LAMPS

Parking lamps

Switch position ≡DQE : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking.

Do not use the parking lamps for extended periods; otherwise, the battery may become discharged and it would then be impossible to start the engine.

When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps.

Low beams

Switch position 📋 with the ignition switched on: the low beams light up.

Roadside parking lamps
Close-up of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols visible)

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.

Switching on

With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds.

Switching off

Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction.

WELCOME LAMPS AND HEADLAMP COURTESY DELAY FEATURE

Welcome lamps

When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in position 📋D or 📋Parking and interior lamps come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked depending on the ambient light.

Activating/deactivating

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"
  3. "Welcome lights"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Headlamp courtesy delay feature

The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlamp flasher is switched on after the lights and ignition are switched off.

Setting the duration

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"
  3. "Pathway lighting:"
  4. Set the duration.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

AUTOMATIC HEADLAMP CONTROL

Switch position the low beams are switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on.

Personal responsibility The automatic handles

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions.

For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS

With the ignition switched on, the daytime running lights light up in position 0, ∃DQ. After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position ∃DQ

Activating/deactivating

In some countries, daytime running lights are compulsory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime running lights.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Lighting"
  3. "Daytime running lamps"

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

CORNERING LAMP

Switch position 10 during cornering, the cornering lamp also lights the interior area of the curve. Below a speed of approx.

25 mph/40 km/h when the flasher is switched on and the steering angle is detected, there is automatic activation.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

Cornering light is disrupted or failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

HIGH-BEAM ASSISTANT

The concept

When the low beams are switched on, this system automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation allows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating

Close-up of a car gear shift lever with a white arrow pointing to the mode (no text or symbols visible)

The High-beam Assistant can be activated when the low beams are switched on.

  1. Turn the light switch to
  2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, arrow.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating - 2

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating - 3

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating - 4

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

When the low beams are on, the lights are automatically brightened or dimmed.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating - 5

The blue indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams.

Switching the high beams on and off manually

Close-up of a car dashboard with two directional arrows indicating left and right motion (no text or symbols)

▷ High beams on, arrow 1.
▶ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2.

The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reactivate the High-beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

System limits

MINI Hardtop (2014) - System limits - 1

Personal responsibility

The high-beam assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situations where this is required to avoid a safety risk.

The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary:

In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation.
In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on freeways.
In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs.
At low speeds.

▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with stickers, etc.

Camera
Front view of a car with a white upward arrow symbol on the roof (no text or labels)

The camera is located near the base of the mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

FOG LAMPS

Front fog lamps

The low beams must be switched on.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Front fog lamps - 1

Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 87, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps.

Rear fog lamps

The low beams or front fog lamps must be switched on.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Rear fog lamps - 1

Press the button. The yellow indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 87, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the rear fog lamps.

RIGHT-HAND/LEFT-HAND TRAFFIC

Halogen headlamps

When crossing over into countries in which driving takes place on the other side of the road than in the country in which the vehicle is registered, measures must be taken to prevent the blinding effect of the headlamps. The service center can provide the necessary masking film. Adhere to the following instructions when applying the film.

LED headlamps

The light distribution of LED headlamps reduces the blinding effect when driving in a country in which driving takes place on the other side of the road than in the country of registration.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING

Adjusting
MINI Hardtop (2014) - INSTRUMENT LIGHTING - 1

The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness.

Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel.

INTERIOR LAMPS

General information

The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automatically.

The brightness of some of these lamps is influenced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting.

2 1 3 2

1 Interior lamps
2 Reading lamp
3 Ambient light

Switching the interior lamps on and off

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching the interior lamps on and off - 1

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds.

Switch back on: press button.

Reading lamps

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Reading lamps - 1

Press the button.

Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps.

Ambient light

Depending on the equipment, the lighting can be adjusted in the interior for some lights.

Changing color

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing color - 1

Push the switch forward or back: manual color change.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing color - 2

Push and hold the switch forward or back: automatic color change. Push

the switch again to end the color changing.

Setting the brightness

The brightness of the ambient light can be adjusted via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display.

  1. 'Settings'
  2. "Lighting"
  3. "Brightness:"
  4. Adjust the brightness.

SAFETY

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

AIRBAGS

Interior view of a car with numbered anatomical labels pointing to key components such as steering wheel, dashboard, and seatbelt.

1 Front airbag, driver
2 Front airbag, front passenger
3 Head airbag

4 Side airbag
5 Knee airbags

Front airbags

Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint.

Side airbags

In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area.

Head airbags

In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head.

Knee airbag

The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact.

Protective action

Airbags are not triggered in every impact situation, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Protective action - 1

Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags

▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags.

▶ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is triggered.

There should be no people, animals, or objects between an airbag and a person.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area.

Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e. do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navigation instruments and mobile phones.

▶ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests.

▶ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.

Do not remove the airbag restraint system.

Do not remove the steering wheel.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the air-bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way.

▶ Never modify either the individual components or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.

Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Protective action - 2

In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags

Do not touch the individual components immediately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns.

Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dismantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explosives.

Non-professional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Functional readiness of the airbag system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Functional readiness of the airbag system - 1

When the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates operational readiness of the entire airbag and the belt tensioner.

Airbag system malfunctioning

▶ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on.

The warning lamp lights up continuously.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Airbag system malfunctioning - 1

When there is a malfunction, have the air-bag system checked immediately

When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in the event of an accident despite corresponding severity of the accident.

Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags

The system determines whether the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the resistance of the human body.

The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags - 1

Leave feet in the footwell

Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags - 2

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety notes and instructions under Children on the front passenger seat.

Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system

When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up.

In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear.

To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle.
Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below.
No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags

Close-up of a car's front and rear dashboard with control buttons and a central touchscreen (no visible text or symbols)

The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags.

The lamp indicates whether the airbags are activated or deactivated.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags - 2

The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fixing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are activated.

Detected child seats

The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.

Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag

The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats.

To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Control Display.

Calibrating the front seats

A corresponding message appears on the Control Display.

  1. Move the respective seat forward all the way.
  2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly.
  3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
    The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears.
    If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration.

If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Calibrating the front seats - 1

Unobstructed area of movement

Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR TPM

The concept

The system monitors tire pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure.

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Tire damage due to external factors

Sudden tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance.

Pay attention to the other information and indications under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 168, as well when using the system.

Functional requirements

The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, reliable signaling of tire pressure loss is not ensured.

Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly.

Status display

On the onboard monitor, the current status of the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM can be displayed, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Tre Pressure Monitor (TPM)"

The status is displayed.

Status display

The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires and a text message on the Control Display.

All wheels green

System is active and will issue a warning relative to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One wheel is yellow

A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire.

All wheels are yellow

A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires.

Wheels, gray

The system cannot detect a flat tire due to a malfunction.

Status information

The status display additionally shows the current tire inflation pressures. The values shown are current measurement values and may vary depending on driving style or weather conditions.

Carry out reset

Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Perform reset"
  4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
  5. Reset the tire pressure using "Perform reset".
  6. Drive away.

The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed.

After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the tire inflation pressures set are accepted as reference values. The resetting process is completed automatically during driving. After successful completion of the reset,

the tires appear in green on the Control Display and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is displayed.

The progress of the reset is displayed.

The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the reset resumes automatically.

Low tire pressure message

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Low tire pressure message - 1

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

A reset of the system was not carried out after a wheel was changed. The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire pressures before the last reset.

  1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.
    Run-flat tires, refer to page 175, are la-beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Low tire pressure message - 2

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

  1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires.

The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility System, refer to page 175, can be used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

  1. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System, refer to page 175.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed

You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

  1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
  3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions.

For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km.

When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord-

ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

Final tire failure Vibrations or lo

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

Required inflation pressure check message

A Check Control message is displayed in the following situations

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was carried out.
▶ Inflation was not carried out according to specifications.
The tire pressure has fallen below the level of the last confirmation.

In this case:

▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.

- Carry out a reset of the system after a tire change.

System limits

The system does not function properly if a reset has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.

The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g., due to driving or because of the heat of the Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also. The tire pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. This behavior may cause a warning to be issued if temperatures fall very sharply.

Malfunction

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Malfunction - 1

The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected.

Display in the following situations:

A wheel without TPM electronics, such as a compact wheel, is mounted: have the service center check it if necessary.
▶ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.
Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system automatically becomes active again.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

FTM FLAT TIRE MONITOR

The concept

The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.

It detects a pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotational speeds of the individual wheels while moving.

In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corresponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire.

Functional requirements

The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; otherwise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not ensured. Initialize the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change.

Status display

The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)"

The status is displayed.

Initialization

The initialization process adopts the set inflation tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Perform reset"
  4. Start the engine - do not drive away.
  5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset".
  6. Drive away.

The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

Indication of a flat tire

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Indication of a flat tire - 1

The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed.

There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure.

  1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
    Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires.
    Run-flat tires, refer to page 175, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Indication of a flat tire - 2

Do not continue driving without run-flat tires

Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.

When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary.

System limits

MINI Hardtop (2014) - System limits - 1

Sudden tire damage

Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance.

A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.

The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

▶ When the system has not been initialized.
▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface.
▶ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration.
▷ When driving with snow chains.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

Normal tires

  1. Identify the damaged tire.

Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires.

The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility System, refer to page 175, can be used for this purpose.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

  1. Rectify the flat tire using the Mobility System, refer to page 175.

Run-flat tires

Maximum speed

You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.

Continued driving with a flat tire

If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:

  1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
  2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
  3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure:

The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions.

For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km.

When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc.

Because the possible driving distance depends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Continued driving with a flat tire - 1

Continued driving with a flat tire

Drive moderately and do not exceed a d of 50 mph/80 km/h.

A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., reduced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Continued driving with a flat tire - 2

Final tire failure

Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.

INTELLIGENT SAFETY

The concept

The intelligent safety systems can help to prevent an imminent collision.

▶ Collision warning with City Braking function, refer to page 100.
▶ Pedestrian warning with city braking function, refer to page 103

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Personal responsibility

The system does not serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation.

Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehicle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

MINI Hardtop (2014) - At a glance - 2

Intelligent Safety button

Switching on/off

Some Intelligent Safety systems are automatically active after each engine start via the start/stop button. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate according to the last setting.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on/off - 1

Press the button:

The menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on/off - 2

Press the button briefly:

▶ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual setting.

▶ LED lights up orange or goes out depending on the individual setting.

Press the button again:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.
The LED lights up green.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on/off - 3

Hold the button down:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

COLLISION WARNING WITH CITY BRAKING FUNCTION

The concept

The system can help to prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system helps to reduce the collision speed.

The system issues a warning if there is imminent danger of a collision and if so brakes independently.

The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration.

The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror.

The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated.

When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings.

General information

The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation.

Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking intervention occurs when appropriate.

Detection range

Top-down view of three cars driving on a road with a shaded lane (no text or symbols)

Vehicles are observed when they are traveling in the same direction of movement if they are located within the detection range of the system.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and air vent (no visible text or symbols)

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Button in the vehicle - 2

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Front view of a car with a white upward arrow symbol on the windshield (no text or labels)

The camera is located near the base of the mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button.

Switching on/off manually

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on/off manually - 1

Press the button: the menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Press the button briefly:

▶ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual setting.

The LED lights up orange.

Press the button again:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold the button down:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the onboard monitor.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Frontal Coll. Warning"
  3. Activate the desired warning time on the Control Display.

The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Warning with braking function

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Adapting your speed and driving style

The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Display

If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

Symbol Measure

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Measure - 1

The vehicle lights up red: prewarning. Increase braking and distance.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Measure - 2

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning.

You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself to intervene. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. A prerequisite for the brake booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: During a braking intervention up until reaching a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Braking intervention - 1

Tow-starting and towing

When tow-starting and towing the vehicle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.

System limits

MINI Hardtop (2014) - System limits - 1

Be alert

Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Detection range

The system's detection capabilities are limited.

This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late.

For example, the following situations may not be detected:

▶ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed.
▶ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles.
▶ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance.
▶ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
▷ Pedestrians.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
In tight curves.
▶ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF.
▶ If the camera in the mirror is dirty or obscured.

During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.
▶ If there is constant dimming because of on-coming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky.

Prewarning sensitivity

Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings.

PEDESTRIAN WARNING WITH CITY BRAKING FUNCTION

The concept

The system can help to prevent accidents with pedestrians.

The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a collision with pedestrians and includes a braking function.

The system is controlled via the camera in the base of the interior mirror.

General information

The system issues a warning with brightness staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and assists with a brake intervention shortly before a collision.

It responds to persons that are within the detection range of the system.

Detection range
graph TD A["Car"] --> B{Traffic Section} B --> C["Path 1"] B --> D["Path 2"] C --> E["Downward Arrow 1"] D --> F["Downward Arrow 2"]

The detection area in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas.

▶ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.
▶ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left.

A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle
Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

MINI Hardtop (2014) - At a glance - 2

Intelligent Safety button

Camera

Front view of a car with a white upward arrow symbol on the roof (no text or labels)

The camera is located near the base of the mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button.

Switching on/off manually

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on/off manually - 1

Press the button: the menu for the intelligent safety system is displayed. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Press the button briefly:

▶ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual setting.

The LED lights up orange.

Press the button again:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on.

The LED lights up green.

Hold the button down:

▶ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off.

The LED goes out.

Warning with braking function

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Adapting your speed and driving style

The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

Display

If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Display - 1

The red symbol is displayed and a signal sounds.

Intervene immediately by braking or making an evasive maneuver.

Braking intervention

The warning prompts the driver himself to intervene. During a warning, the maximum braking force is used. A prerequisite for the brake booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can assist with a slight braking intervention. The intervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: During a braking intervention up until reaching a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated.

The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Braking intervention - 1

Tow-starting and towing

When tow-starting and towing the vehicle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.

System limits

MINI Hardtop (2014) - System limits - 1

Be alert

Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Detection range

The detection capability of the camera is limited.

This may result in the warning not being issued or being issued late.

For example, the following situations may not be detected:

▶ Partially covered pedestrians.
▶ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour.
▶ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
▶ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations:

In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.

In tight curves.

▶ If the camera view field or the front wind-shield are dirty or covered.

▶ When driving toward bright lights.

▶ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop knob.

During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.

▷ When it is dark outside.

BRAKE FORCE DISPLAY

The concept
Two grayscale images showing a stylized eye inside a rounded square frame, with no visible text or symbols.

During normal brake application, the brake lamps light up.
During heavy brake application, the flash-ers light up in addition.

DRIVING STABILITY CONTROL SYSTEMS

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety.

ABS is operational every time you start the engine.

BRAKE ASSISTANT

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. This then reduces braking distance to a minimum during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

DSC DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL

The concept

DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating.

DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle conditions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Subject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - The concept - 1

Adjust your driving style to the situation

An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC.

Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.

Indicator/warning lamps

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Indicator/warning lamps - 1

The indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has

failed.

Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF

When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends.

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.

Deactivating DSC

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Deactivating DSC - 1

Press and hold the button, but not longer than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the instrument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.

The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSC

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating DSC - 1

Press the button.

DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lamps

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Indicator/warning lamps - 1

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.

Automatic activation

When DSC is deactivated, automatic activation occurs in the following situations:

▶ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
The vehicle has a flat tire.
▶ When activating cruise control in TRACTION or DSC OFF mode.

DTC DYNAMIC TRACTION CONTROL

The concept

The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized.

The system ensures maximum forward momentum on special road conditions, e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but driving stability is limited.

It is therefore necessary to drive with appropriate caution.

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

▶ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads.
▶ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in deep snow or on loose surfaces.
▶ When driving with snow chains.

Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control

Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. TRACTION is activated. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends.

Activating DTC

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating DTC - 1

Press the button.

TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up.

Deactivating DTC

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Deactivating DTC - 1

Press the button again.

TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator

lamp go out.

PERFORMANCE CONTROL

Performance Control enhances the agility of your vehicle.

To enhance performance during sporty driving, the front wheel on the inside of the curve is braked while the resulting braking effect is largely compensated by engine intervention.

DYNAMIC DAMPING CON- TROL

The concept

This system reduces undesirable vehicle motion when using a dynamic driving style or traveling on uneven road surfaces.

The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style.

Programs

The system offers several different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 108.

MID/GREEN

Balanced control of the vehicle.

SPORT

Consistently sporty control of the shock absorbers for greater driving agility.

DRIVING DYNAMICS CON- TROL

The concept

The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to adjust the certain characteristics of the vehicle. Three different programs can be selected for this purpose. By turning the Driving Dynamics Control, a particular program can be activated.

Operating the programs

Driving Dynamics Control Program

SPORT » » GRI/CEAN

MID

GREEN

SPORT

MID

For balanced tuning.

With each starting operation, MID is activated using the Start/Stop button.

GREEN

GREEN, refer to page 156, provides consistent tuning to maximize range.

Activating GREEN

Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the right until GREEN is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN

Via the Driving Dynamics Control

  1. Activate GREEN.
  2. "Configure GREEN"
  3. Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

Via onboard monitor:

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "GREEN Mode"

Or

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Driving mode"
  3. "Configure GREEN"

Configure the program.

This configuration is retrieved when GREEN is activated.

SPORT

Consistently sporty tuning of the body and engine control for greater driving agility.

Depending on the equipment version, SPORT can be individually configured.

Activating SPORT

Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the left until SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring SPORT

Depending on the equipment version, when the display is activated on the Control Display, the SPORT driving mode can be configured for individual specifications.

Activating SPORT.

Select "Configure SPORT".

Configure the program.

SPORT can also be configured before it is activated:

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Driving mode"
  3. "Configure SPORT"

This configuration is retrieved when SPORT is activated.

Configuring drive program

Settings can be made for the following driving programs in Driving mode:

▷ GREEN, refer to page 108.
▶ SPORT, refer to page 108.

Displays

Program selection

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Program selection - 1

When the Driving Dynamics Control is turned, a list of programs that can be selected is displayed.

Selected program

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Selected program - 1

The selected program is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Display on the Control Display

Program changes can be displayed on the Control Display.

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Control display"
  3. "Driving mode info"

DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT

This system supports driving away on gradients. The parking brake is not required.

  1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
  2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay.

After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.

Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT - 1

Driving off without delay

After releasing the foot brake, start driving without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.

DRIVING COMFORT

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

CAMERA-BASED CRUISE CONTROL, ACC

The concept

This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear roads.

To the extent possible, the system automatically adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you.

A camera on the interior rear view mirror is used to detect vehicles driving ahead.

The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied.

For safety reasons, it depends on the speed.

To maintain a certain distance, the system automatically decelerates, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster.

As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed.

The speed is also maintained on downhill gradients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient.

General information

Depending on the set drive mode, refer to page 108, the characteristics of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Personal responsibility

Even an active system does not release the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process, especially for lane tracking, adaptation of speed, distance and driving style to the traffic conditions.

Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations.

Monitor the driving process, the surrounding area and what is occurring in traffic continuously and attentively and actively intervene as required, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Unfavorable weather conditions

In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions, for instance if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of traffic situations as well as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already detected. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press the buttonFunction
MINI Hardtop (2014) - At a glance - 1Cruise control on/off, interrupting, refer to page 111
MINI Hardtop (2014) - At a glance - 2Store/maintain speed, refer to page 112
MINI Hardtop (2014) - At a glance - 3Resume speed, refer to page 112
Reduce distance, refer to page 112
Increase distance, refer to page 112
Maintain or save speed, refer to page 112Increase maintain or save speed, refer to page 112
Maintain or save speed, refer to page 112Reduce, maintain or store speed, refer to page 112

The arrangement of the buttons varies according to the how the vehicle is equipped or country-specific variants.

Camera
Front view of a car with a white upward arrow symbol on the roof (no text or labels)

The camera is located near the base of the mirror.

Keep the windshield in the area behind the interior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on - 1

Press the button on the steering wheel.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on - 2

Display in the instrument cluster lights up.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on - 3

Display in the instrument cluster lights up. The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and displayed on the

symbol.

Cruise control can be used.

Switching off

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off - 1

Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter-

rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off - 2

Press the button on the steering wheel.

▶ If active: press twice.
▶ If interrupted: press once.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted.

Interrupting

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Interrupting - 1

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The system is automatically interrupted if:

The brakes are applied.
The clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
▶ Selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.
The detection range of the camera is distorted, for example, by soiling, heavy precipitation or glare from the sun.
The vehicle in front decelerates below a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

Maintaining/storing the speed

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Maintaining/storing the speed - 1

Press the button.

Or:

+ or -Press button in the interrupted state.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Maintaining/storing the speed - 2

The speed is displayed on the symbol.

When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

switched on, if necessary.

Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed

+ or —button: by pressing one of the buttons while the system is interrupted, the current speed can be maintained and stored. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed - 1

Adapting the desired speed

Adapt the desired speed to the road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed - 2

Speed differences

Large differences in speed relative to other vehicles cannot be compensated by the system for example in the following situations:

▷ When quickly approaching a slowly moving vehicle.

When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane.

+ or -button: press until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear.

or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed

increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/km/

or button: each time it is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

+ or -button: hold down to repeat the corresponding action.

Distance

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Distance - 1

Selecting a distance

Adjust the distance according to the traffic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.

Reduce distance

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Reduce distance - 1

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Reduce distance - 2

The set distance increment is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.

Increase distance

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Increase distance - 1

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Increase distance - 2

The set distance increment is briefly displayed in the left part of the instrument cluster.

Calling up the desired speed and distance

While driving

MINI Hardtop (2014) - While driving - 1

Press the button with the system inter- rupted. The regulation of the desired speed and distance is continued with the stored values. The selected distance is briefly displayed in the info display.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

▷ When the system is switched off.
▶ When the ignition is switched off.

Changing between cruise control with/without distance control

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing between cruise control with/without distance control - 1

Traffic driving ahead

The cruise control does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. Take this factor into account – you yourself must react; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

To switch over to cruise control:

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Traffic driving ahead - 1

Press and hold the button, or

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Traffic driving ahead - 2

Press and hold the button.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Traffic driving ahead - 3

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and check-control message is displayed as soon as the

switch is made to cruise control.

To switch back to the camera-based cruise control, press one of the buttons.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Desired speed

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Desired speed - 1

In addition to the indicator lamp, the desired speed is displayed in the info display.

The indicator lights up green: the system is active.
The indicator lights up orange: the system has been interrupted.
▶ No display: system is switched off.

Brief status display

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Brief status display - 1

Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system requirements for operation are currently not met.

Distance to vehicle ahead of you

Selected distance from the vehicle driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left hand portion of the info display.

Distance display

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Distance display - 1

Distance 1

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Distance display - 2

Distance 2

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Distance display - 3

Distance 3

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Distance display - 4

Distance 4

This value is set after the system is switched on.

Indicator/warning lamps

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Indicator/warning lamps - 1

Personal responsibility

The indicator and warning lamps do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Personal responsibility - 1

The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Personal responsibility - 2

The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for operating the system.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Personal responsibility - 3

The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds:

You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Personal responsibility - 4

The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated because the accelerator pedal is being pressed;

a vehicle was not detected.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Personal responsibility - 5

Distance control is deactivated because the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected.

Changing between cruise control with/without distance control

Display in the instrument cluster:

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing between cruise control with/without distance control - 1

Cruise Control without distance control.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing between cruise control with/without distance control - 2

Camera-based cruise control with distance control.

Displays in the Head-up Display

The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Display.

Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to page 83.

System limits

Speed range

The optimum area of use is on well constructed roads. The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

The max. speed that can be set is 85 mph/140 km/h.

Comply with the legal speed limit in every situation when using the system.

Detection range

Top-down view of three cars driving on a road with a shaded triangular area (no text or symbols)

The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited.

Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Detection range - 2

Limited detection capacity

Because of the limits to the detection capacity of the camera, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate for:

▶ Pedestrians, cyclists or similar slow road users.
▶ Red traffic lights.
▷ Cross traffic.
▶ Oncoming traffic.
▶ Unlit vehicles or vehicles with defective lighting at night.

Swerving vehicles

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Swerving vehicles - 2

Swerving vehicles

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. This also applies to major speed differences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if necessary. You must react yourself; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

Cornering

Top-down view of two cars driving on a curved road with dashed lane markings (no text or symbols visible)

If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance.

Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a considerable delay.

Top-down view of two cars on a curved road with dashed lane markings (no text or symbols)

When approaching a curve, the system may react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails or was automatically deactivated.

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

▶ If an object was not correctly detected.
In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snowfall.
In tight curves.
▷ If the camera view field or the front wind-shield are dirty or covered.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
▶ Up to 20 seconds after the start of the engine, via the Start/Stop knob.
During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle shipment.

CRUISE CONTROL

The concept

The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.

It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel.

The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking action is insufficient.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - The concept - 1

Unfavorable conditions

Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a constant speed, for instance:

On curvy roads.

In heavy traffic.

On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface.

Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.

General information

Depending on the set drive mode, refer to page 108, the characteristics of the cruise control can change in certain areas.

Controls

At a glance
Press the button Function

System on/off, interrupt
SETStore speed
RESResume speed
+Increasing, maintaining or storing the speed
-Reducing, maintaining or storing the speed

Switching on

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on - 1

Press the button on the steering wheel.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on - 2

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on - 3

The current speed is adopted as the desired speed and is displayed with the symbol in the instrument cluster.

Cruise control can be used.

Switching off

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off - 1

Deactivated or interrupted system

If the system is deactivated or interrupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off - 2

Press the button.

▶ If active: press twice.
▶ If interrupted: press once.

The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted.

Interrupting

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Interrupting - 1

When active, press the button.

The system is automatically interrupted if:

The brakes are applied.
The clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released while a gear is not engaged.
The gear engaged is too high for the current speed.
▷ Selector lever position N is engaged.
▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ DSC is actively controlling stability.

Maintaining/storing the current speed

SET

Press the button.

Or

+ or —button: press while the system is interrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed.

This is displayed in the instrument cluster.

When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary.

Changing/maintaining speed

+ or —button: can be pressed while the system is interrupted in order to maintain and store the current speed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Changing/maintaining speed - 1

Adapting the desired speed

Adapt the desired speed to the road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

+ or —button: press repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear.

▶ or button: each time it is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

▶ or button: each time it is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.

The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle.

▶ or button: pressing it to the resistance point and holding it there accelerates or decelerates the vehicle without requiring

pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the button is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed

RES

Press the button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Indicator lamp

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Indicator lamp - 1

Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster indicates whether the sys-switched on.

Desired speed

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Desired speed - 1

The desired speed is displayed together with the symbol.

The indicator lights up green: the system is active.

The indicator lights up orange: the system has been interrupted.

▶ No display: system is switched off.

Brief status display

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Brief status display - 1

Selected desired speed.

If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the system requirements for operation are currently not met.

PDC PARK DISTANCE CON- TROL

The concept

PDC supports you when parking. Slowly approaching an object behind or, with the appropriate equipment, also in front of your vehicle is signaled by:

▷ Signal tones.
▷ Visual display.

General information

Measurements are made by ultrasound sensors in the bumpers.

The range, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning is first given:

By the front middle sensors and the two corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Check the traffic situation as well

PDC cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside of the PDC detection range.

Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's signal tone.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Avoid driving quickly with PDC

Avoid approaching an object quickly.

Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active.

For technical reasons, the system may otherwise be too late in issuing a warning.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle
Close-up of a car dashboard with multiple switches and a central 'START STOP' button (no readable text or symbols beyond basic labels)

MINI Hardtop (2014) - At a glance - 2

PDC Park Distance Control

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

PDC switches on automatically in the following situations:

▶ If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running.
If, with the appropriate equipment, obstacles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2 mph/3 km/h.

Automatic activation when obstacles are detected can be switched off:

  1. "Settings"
  2. "Parking"
  3. Select the setting.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on/off manually - 1

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up.
▶ Off: the LED goes out.

Display

Signal tones

When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object becomes, the shorter the intervals.

If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded.

If objects are located both in front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating continuous signal is sounded.

The signal tone is switched off:

▷ When the vehicle moves away from an object by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm.
▶ When selector lever position P is engaged.

Volume

The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted, refer to user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Visual warning

The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds.

A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated.

The range of the sensors is represented in colors: red, green and yellow.

When the image of the rearview camera is displayed, the switch can be made to PDC:

"Rear view camera"

System limits

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances:

▶ For small children and animals.
▶ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats.
▶ If there is an external disturbance of the ultrasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.
▶ Under certain weather conditions, such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall extreme heat or strong wind.
▶ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other vehicles.
▶ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▶ With moving objects.
▶ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
▶ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▶ With objects with a fine surface structure, such as fences.
▶ For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

False warnings

PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range:

▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice.
▶ When sensors are covered in snow.
On rough road surfaces.
On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps.
In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground garages.
In heavy exhaust.
Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights.

The malfunction is signaled by a continuous tone alternating between the front and rear speakers. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultrasound sources is no longer present, the system is again fully functional.

Malfunction

A Check Control message, refer to page 72, is displayed in the instrument cluster.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Malfunction - 1

Red symbol is displayed, and the range of the sensors is darkly displayed on the Control Display.

PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

To ensure full operability:

▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
Do not adhere any stickers to the sensors.
When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

REARVIEW CAMERA

The concept

The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display.

Hints

Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located outside the picture area of the backup camera.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle
Close-up of a car dashboard with multiple switches and a central 'START STOP' button (no readable text or symbols beyond basic labels)

MINI Hardtop (2014) - At a glance - 2

Rearview camera

Camera
Close-up of a car's front bumper with the Mini logo and an arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols beyond the logo)

The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt.

Clean the lens, refer to page 210.

Switching on/off

Switching on automatically

With the engine running, engage selector lever position R.

The rearview camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the onboard monitor.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel

The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

Switch the system back on if necessary.

Switching on/off manually

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on/off manually - 1

Press the button.

On: the LED lights up.

▶ Off: the LED goes out.

The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

Switch on the rearview camera via the onboard monitor

With PDC activated:

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switch on the rearview camera via the onboard monitor - 1

"Rear view camera"

The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement

The rearview camera is switched on.

The tailgate is fully closed.

Activating the assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be active at the same time.

▶ Parking aid lines

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating the assistance functions - 1

"Parking aid lines"

Pathway and turning circle lines are displayed.

▶ Obstacle marking

Pr "Obstacle marking"

Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Pathway lines

Aerial view of a long elevated road with parallel tracks, no visible text or symbols.

▶ Can be shown in the rearview camera image.

▶ Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Are dependent on the current steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines

Exterior view of a road with two intersecting curved lines forming an X shape (no text or symbols)

▶ Can be shown in the rearview camera image.

▶ Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road.

▶ Only one turning circle line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle.

Obstacle marking

Close-up of a curved surface with two vertical cylindrical components and a grid pattern, no visible text or symbols

Marks for detected obstacles can be shown in the rearview camera image.

Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown.

Parking using pathway and turning circle lines

  1. Position the vehicle so that the turning circle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

Exterior view of a road with intersecting curved lines (no signage or text)

  1. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Exterior view of a paved road with visible lane markings and no signage or text

Display settings

Brightness

With the rearview camera switched on:

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

Contrast

With the rearview camera switched on:

  1. Select the symbol.
  2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached and press the controller.

System limits

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles or high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be recognized by the system.

Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC.

Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to page 118.

The objects displayed in the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display.

PARKING ASSISTANT

The concept

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars and a curved arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

This system assists the driver in parking parallel to the road.

Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.

The parking assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of steering during the parking procedure.

When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information issued by the PDC, the parking assistant and, where applicable, the rearview camera, and react accordingly.

A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 118.

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Personal responsibility

Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process.

Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations.

Continuously and attentively monitor the driving process, the area surrounding the vehicle and the traffic situation, and actively intervene when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an accident.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Changes to the parking space

Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 3

Transporting loads

Loads that extend beyond the perimeter of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 4

Curbs

The parking assistant may steer the vehicle over or onto curbs.

Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehicle may become damaged.

An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automatically when the parking assistant is activated.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces

▶ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

▶ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

▷ Gaps behind an object that have a min. length of 5 ft/1.5 m.

▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 3.3 ft/1.0 m.

▶ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

For parking procedure

▶ Doors and tailgate closed.

▶ Parking brake released.

When parking in parking spaces on the driver's side, the corresponding turn signal must be set.

At a glance

Button in the vehicle
Close-up of a car dashboard with five rotary switches labeled M1, M2, M3, M4, M5 (no readable text beyond labels)

MINI Hardtop (2014) - At a glance - 2

Parking assistant

Ultrasound sensors
Close-up of a car tire and wheel with a white arrow pointing to the wheel rim (no text or symbols visible)

The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel arches.

To ensure full operability:

▶ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Do not paste over sensors.

Switching on/off

Switching on with the button

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching on with the button - 1

Press the button.

The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display.

To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Switching off

The system can be deactivated as follows:

▷ Press the button.

▷ Switch off the ignition.

Indicator on the Control Display

System activated/deactivated

Symbol Meaning

Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated.

P The system is activated.

System status
Top-down view of a car with two white arrows pointing downward to the roof, indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols present)

Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle representation. Parking assistant is activated and search for parking space active.

▶ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the road as on the Control Display. When the

parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted.

The parking procedure is ac-

MINI Hardtop (2014) - System activated/deactivated - 2

tive. Steering control has been seized.

Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forwards slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray.

Parking using the parking assistant

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Parking using the parking assistant - 1

Check the traffic situation as well

Loud sounds outside and within the vehicle can drown out the signal tones of the parking assistant and PDC.

Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.

  1. Switch on the parking assistant and activate it if necessary.

The status of the parking space search is indicated on the display.

  1. Follow the instructions on the display.

To achieve the best possible parking position, wait for the automatic steering wheel movement after the gear change when the vehicle is stationary.

The end of the parking procedure is indicated on the display.

  1. Adjust the parking position yourself if necessary.

Interrupting manually

The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time:

▶ "Parking Assistant"

▷ Press the button.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Interrupting manually - 1

Interrupting automatically

The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations:

If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering.

▶ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the display.

▶ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.

On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces if necessary.

▶ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.

▶ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays clearances that are too small.

▷ When switching into other functions of the radio.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Resume

An interrupted parking procedure can be continued if necessary.

To do this, follow the instructions on the display.

System limits

No parking assistance

The parking assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations:

In tight curves.

Functional limitations

The system may not be fully functional in the following situations:

On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.

On slippery ground.

When leaves or snow has collected in the parking space.

▶ With a mounted emergency wheel.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement

The detection of objects can reach the physical limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances:

▶ For small children and animals.
▶ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats.
▶ If there is an external disturbance of the ultrasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, damaged or out of position.
▶ Under certain weather conditions, such as high relative humidity, rain, snowfall extreme heat or strong wind.
▶ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other vehicles.
▶ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
▶ With moving objects.
▶ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo.
▶ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▶ With objects with a fine surface structure, such as fences.
▶ For objects with porous surfaces.

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.

The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked.

CLIMATE CONTROL

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

AIR CONDITIONER
1 2 3 OFF 9 8 7 6 5 A/C 4

1 Vent settings
2 Air flow
3 Temperature
4 Seat heating, right 49
5 Cooling function

6 Recirculated-air mode
7 Rear window defroster
8 Windshield defroster
9 Seat heating, left 49

Climate control functions in detail

Manual air distribution

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Manual air distribution - 1

Turn the wheel to select the desired program or the desired intermediate setting.

Windows.
▶ Upper body region.
▶ Footwell.
Windows, upper body region, and foot-well.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Direct the air distribution toward windows, increase the air flow and temperature, and, if necessary, use the cooling function.

Air flow, manual

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Air flow, manual - 1

Turn the wheel to set the desired air volume.

The higher the rate, the more effective the heating or cooling will be.

The air flow of the air conditioner may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

Temperature

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Temperature - 1

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

Cooling function

The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Cooling function - 1

Press the button.

The air is cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

When using the air conditioner, condensation water, refer to page 150, develops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Recirculated-air mode

You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Recirculated-air mode - 1

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

▶ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▶ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

Recirculated air mode switches off automatically at low external temperatures after a certain amount of time in order to window fogging.

If the windows fog over, switch off recirculated-air mode and increase the air flow, if necessary.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Recirculated-air mode - 2

Continuous recirculated-air mode

The recirculated-air mode should not be used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.

Rear window defroster

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Rear window defroster - 1

Press the button.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When Green mode, refer to page 156, is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Windshield defroster

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Windshield defroster - 1

Press the button.

The front window defroster switches

off automatically after a certain period of time.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off - 1

Turn wheel for air quantity to the left until the control switches off.

Switching on

Set any air volume.

Microfilter

In external and recirculated air mode the microfilter filters dust and pollen out of the air.

This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 186, of your vehicle.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL

1 2 3 4 5 AUTO OFF 6 7 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 A C M A/C MAX A/C

1 Temperature, left
2 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity
4 AUTO program
5 Air distribution, manual
6 Display

7 Temperature, right
8 Seat heating, right 49
9 Maximum cooling
10 Cooling function
11 Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode
12 Rear window defroster

13 Windshield defroster
14 Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Climate control functions in detail

Temperature

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Temperature - 1

Turn the wheel to set the desired temperature.

The automatic climate control reaches this temperature as quickly as possible, if necessary by increasing the cooling or heating output, and then keeps it constant.

Avoid rapidly switching between different temperature settings. The automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.

Air flow, manual

To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch off the AUTO program first.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Air flow, manual - 1

Turn the wheel to set the desired air volume.

The selected air quantity is displayed on the automatic climate control.

The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power.

AUTO program

MINI Hardtop (2014) - AUTO program - 1

Press the button.

Air flow, air distribution, and temperature are controlled automatically.

Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is di-

15 Seat heating, left 49

rected to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell.

The cooling function, refer to page 131, and the automatic recirculation control, refer to page 131, are automatically also switched on in the AUTO program.

To switch off the program: press the button again or manually adjust the air distribution.

Intensity of the AUTO program

With the AUTO program switched on, automatic control of the air flow and air distribution can be adjusted.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Intensity of the AUTO program - 1

Turn the wheel to set the desired intensity.

The selected intensity is displayed on the automatic climate control.

Manual air distribution

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Manual air distribution - 1

Press the button repeatedly to select a program:

▶ Upper body region.
▶ Upper body region and footwell.
▶ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell.
▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▶ Windows and upper body region.
▷ Windows.

Maximum cooling

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Maximum cooling - 1

Press the button.

The system is set to the lowest temperature, maximum air flow and recirculated-air mode.

Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this.

The function is available above external temperature of approx. 32 °F/0 °C and with the engine running.

The air flow can be adjusted when the program is active.

Cooling function

The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Cooling function - 1

Press the button.

The air is cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 150, develops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode

You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode - 1

Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode:

▶ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously.

▶ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff automatically.

Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is permanently blocked.

Recirculated air mode switches off automatically at low external temperatures after a certain amount of time in order to window fogging.

If windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculating mode and press the AUTO button. Make sure that air can flow onto the wind-shield.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode - 2

Continuous recirculated-air mode

The recirculated-air mode should not be used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates steadily.

Rear window defroster

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Rear window defroster - 1

Press the button.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

When Green mode, refer to page 156, is activated, the heater output is reduced.

Windshield defroster

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Windshield defroster - 1

Press the button.

The front window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Defrosting windows and removing condensation - 1

Press the button.

Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows.

The air flow can be adjusted when the program is active.

If the windows fog over, also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button.

Switching the system on/off

Switching off

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Switching off - 1

Turn wheel for air quantity to the left until the control switches off.

Switching on

Set any air volume.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter

In external and recirculated air mode the microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.

This filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 186, of your vehicle.

VENTILATION

Close-up of a car wheel with directional arrows indicating flow or motion (no text or symbols)

▶ Turn knob for continuous opening and closing of the vents.

▶ Swivel the vents to alter the direction of the vent flow, arrow.

Adjusting the ventilation

▶ Ventilation for cooling:

Adjust the vent to direct the air in your direction, such as if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun.

▶ Draft-free ventilation:

Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.

PARKED-CAR VENTILATION

The concept

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehicle interior and lowers its temperature, if necessary.

The system can be switched on and off at any external temperature, either directly or by using two preset switch-on times. It remains switched on for 30 minutes.

Open the vents to allow air to flow out.

Switching on/off directly

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Climate"

  3. "Activate comf. ventilation"

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes if the system is switched on.

Preselecting the switch-on time

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Climate"

  3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

  4. Set the desired time.

Activating the switch-on time

  1. "Settings"

  2. "Climate"

  3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2"

The symbol on the automatic climate control lights up when the switch-on time is activated.

The symbol on the automatic climate control flashes when the system has been switched on.

The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reactivated.

INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER

The concept

The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener replaces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be programmed with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - The concept - 1

During programming

During programming and before activating a device using the integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.

Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.

Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security.

Compatibility

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Compatibility - 1

If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the universal garage door opener.

If you have any questions, please contact:

▶ Your service center.

▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

At a glance

1 2 3

1 LED

2 Programmable keys

3 Hand-held transmitters of the system

Programming

General information

  1. Switch on the ignition.

  2. Initial setup:

Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror.

  1. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.
  2. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be programmed on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will begin flashing slowly.
  3. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed.

If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance between the interior rearview mirror and the handheld transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

  1. To program other functions on other buttons, repeat steps 3 to 5.

The systems can be controlled using the interior rearview mirror buttons.

Special feature of the alternating-code wireless system

If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternating-code system.

Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system

features an alternating-code system. Flashing and continuous illumination of the LED will repeat for approximately 20 seconds.

For systems with an alternating-code system, the universal garage door opener and the system also have to be synchronized.

Please read the operating manual of the system being set up for information on how to synchronize the system.

Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person.

To synchronize:

  1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-controlled system.
  2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described.
  3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
  4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this work step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out.

Reprogramming individual buttons

  1. Switch on the ignition.
  2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed.
  3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter.

  4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter.

  5. Release both buttons as soon as the interior rearview mirror LED flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror.

If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts.

Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds.

Controls

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Controls - 1

Before operation

Before operating a system using the integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage.

Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.

The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rearview mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rearview mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being transmitted.

Deleting stored functions

Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually.

DIGITAL COMPASS

At a glance
2 1

1 Control button

2 Mirror display

Mirror display

The point of the compass is displayed in the mirror when driving straight.

Operating concept

Various functions can be called up by pressing the control button with a pointed object, such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object. The following setting options are displayed in succession, depending on how long the control button is pressed:

▶ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
▶ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering setting.
▶ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.

Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the vehicle so that the compass operates correctly; refer to World map with compass zones.

World map with magnetic zones

| Region | Value | | -------------- | ----- | | North America | 12 | | Europe | 11 | | Asia | 10 | | Africa | 9 | | South America | 8 | | Australia | 7 | | Antarctica | 6 | | Middle East | 5 | | Central Europe | 4 | | Southern Europe| 3 | | Northern Europe| 2 | | Southern Europe| 1 |

Procedure

  1. Press and hold the control button for approx. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the set compass zone appears in the mirror.
  2. To change the zone setting, press the control button quickly and repeatedly until the number of the compass zone corresponding to your location appears in the mirror.

The set zone is stored automatically. The compass is ready for use again after approximately 10 seconds.

Calibrating the digital compass

The digital compass must be calibrated in the event of the following:

The wrong point of the compass is displayed.
The point of the compass displayed does not change despite changing the direction of travel.
▷ Not all points of the compass are displayed.

Procedure

  1. Make sure that there are no large metallic objects or overhead power lines near the vehicle and that there is sufficient room to drive around in a circle.
  2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
  3. Press and hold the control button for approx. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears on the display. Next, drive in a complete circle at least once at a speed of no more than 4 mph / 7 km / h . If calibration is successful, the "C" is replaced by the points of the compass.

Left/right-hand steering

The digital compass is already set for right or left-hand steering at the factory.

Setting the language

Press and hold the control button for approx. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control button again to switch between English "E" and German "O".

The setting is stored automatically after approximately 10 seconds.

CONNECTING ELECTRICAL DE- VICES

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 3

Keep the airbag unfolding area clear

Make sure that the devices and cable are located outside of the unfolding area of the airbag; otherwise, its unfolding can be hindered or objects can be hurled through the interior when the airbag unfolds.

Sockets

Sockets can be used for the operation of electrical devices with the engine running or with the ignition switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

In the center console
Interior view of a car gear shift lever and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

In the cargo area
Close-up of a car's front and side panels showing illuminated components (no text or symbols visible)

The socket is located on the right side in the cargo area.

USB INTERFACE

The concept

Connection for USB devices with music files and for importing data, such as for Personal Profile settings.

At a glance

Close-up of a car's front panel with circular buttons and a white arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)

The USB interface is located in the front of the center console.

Hints

Observe the following when connecting:

Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB interface.
Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface.
Do not connect any USB hard drives or USB hubs.
Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices.

ASHTRAY/CIGARETTE LIGHTER

At a glance

Interior view of a car gear shift lever showing internal components and mode dial (no text or symbols visible)

The ashtray is located in one of the front cupholders, the cigarette lighter above it in the center console.

Ashtray

In order to empty the ashtray, remove the ash-tray from the cupholder.

Lighter

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Lighter - 1

Danger of burns

Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Lighter - 2

Replace the cover after use

Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Lighter - 3

Push in the lighter.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

CARGO AREA

Cargo cover

When the tailgate is opened, the cargo cover is raised.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Cargo cover - 1

Do not deposit heavy objects

Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may pose a risk to occupants, such as during braking and avoidance maneuvers.

To stow bulky objects, the cargo cover can be removed:

Removing cargo cover

  1. Detach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

  2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets on the left and right.

Interior view of a car showing a rear truss structure with a white arrow pointing to the back panel (no text or symbols visible)

Installing cargo cover

  1. Slide the cover forward horizontally into the two side brackets until it audibly latches.

  2. Attach the left and right retaining straps at the tailgate.

Enlarging the cargo area

General information

The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest.

The rear seat backrest is divided into two parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The backrest of the right seat is connected to the backrest center section.

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Danger of pinching

Before folding down the rear seat backrests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. Ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests. Otherwise, injury or damage may result.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Push the headrests down, before the backrests are folded down

Before folding down the rear seat backrests, make sure that the corresponding headrest is pushed all the way down; otherwise, damage may result.

Folding down rear seat backrest

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the front or from the cargo area.

Before the backrest is folded down, hook the corresponding safety belt into the safety belt on the side.

Interior view of a car showing seatbelt and dashboard (no text or symbols visible)

Pull the release upward and fold the backrest toward the front.

Folding back the backrest

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Folding back the backrest - 1

Ensure that the lock is securely engaged When folding back the backrest, make sure that it securely locks in place. When this happens the red warning field on the seat disappears. If the backrest is not properly engaged, transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants.

Fold up the backrest and press it into the latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not pinched.

Adjusting the backrest tilt

To transport bulky items, the cargo area can be expanded by setting the backrests at a steeper angle.

  1. Released the back rest, and tilt it forward.

  2. Fold the frame, arrow, up until it latches.

Interior view of a car door with a white arrow pointing to the door panel, showing wiring and electrical outlets (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Fold back and latch the backrest.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Adjusting the backrest tilt - 2

Do not install any child restraint systems

When the backrests are set at steeper position, did not install any child restraint systems on the backrest; otherwise, their protective effect may be impaired.

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

AT A GLANCE

The following storage compartments are available in the vehicle interior:

Storage compartment in front of the cupholders.
▶ Storage tray in the center console.
▶ Glove compartment on the front passenger side.
Storage compartment above the glove compartment.
▶ Storage compartment in the center arm-rest.
▶ Compartments in the doors.
▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front seats.
Net underneath the center console in the footwell of the front seat passenger.

SAFETY INFORMATION

MINI Hardtop (2014) - SAFETY INFORMATION - 1

No loose objects in the passenger compartment

Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance maneuvers.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - SAFETY INFORMATION - 2

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dashboard.

GLOVE COMPARTMENT

Opening
Interior view of a car dashboard with air vent and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment switches on.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - GLOVE COMPARTMENT - 2

Close the glove compartment again im- mediately

Close the glove compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.

Closing

Fold up the cover.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT ABOVE THE GLOVE COM- PARTMENT

Opening
Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel, showing dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

Press the lower edge of the cover.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - STORAGE COMPARTMENT ABOVE THE GLOVE COM- PARTMENT - 2

Immediately close the storage compartment

Close the storage compartment immediately after use while driving; otherwise, injury may occur during accidents.

Closing

Push the cover back into the original position.

COMPARTMENTS IN THE DOORS

MINI Hardtop (2014) - COMPARTMENTS IN THE DOORS - 1

Do not stow any breakable objects

Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.

CENTER ARMREST

The center armrest contains a storage compartment.

Opening
Close-up of a car's seatbelt mechanism with directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

Press the button, arrow 1, and open center arm rest upward, arrow 2.

CUPHOLDERS

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks

Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Unsuitable containers

Do not forcefully push unsuitable containers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.

Front
Close-up of a car's internal gear shift lever and two empty cup holders (no text or symbols visible)

In the center console.

Rear

Interior view of a car showing rear seats and seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

In front of the back seats and in the side armrests.

CLOTHES HOOKS

The clothes hooks are located above the side windows in the rear.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - CLOTHES HOOKS - 1

Do not obstruct view

When suspending clothing from the

hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's vision.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - CLOTHES HOOKS - 2

No heavy objects

Do not hang heavy objects from the

hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive maneuvers.

STORAGE SPACE UNDER THE CARGO FLOOR PANEL

Top-down view of a car interior showing the rear compartment with a highlighted rectangular area and a white panel (no text or symbols visible)

Located under the cargo floor panel on the right side is a trough for the onboard vehicle tool kit.

To remove the onboard vehicle tool kit, fold the right side of the cargo area floor upward.

VARIABLE CARGO AREA FLOOR

With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo area can be configured corresponding to transport requirements. To do this, remove the cargo area floor, and insert it in the desired position.

Follow the instructions for securing cargo, refer to page 151.

Lower position

Interior view of a car showing the backrest area with plastic sheet inside (no text or symbols visible)

▶ Larger objects can be transported.
▶ Space for smaller objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Folded up position

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Folded up position - 1

The variable cargo area may not be used as a partition net to separate the cargo area and the passenger compartment.

▶ Only use the variable cargo floor in the folded-up position when the backrests are folded up and locked.
▶ Always secure cargo against shifting, using straps, belts and lashing eyes, for example.

If you do not observe this precaution, you can endanger vehicle occupants and damage the cargo floor during braking.

Interior view of a car showing the intake tray and structural frame (no text or symbols visible)

Fold up the variable loading floor in the lower position, and push it behind the locks on the left and right, arrow.

The maximum cargo area height is achieved.
The cargo net can be loaded with lightweight and flat objects.

Upper position

Interior view of a car showing the backrest door and rear panel (no visible text or symbols)

▶ With the backrests folded down, a long, flat loading surface is produced.

Maximum load in this position: 330 lbs/150 kg.

Space for objects remains between the fixed and variable cargo area floor.

Nighttime street scene with illuminated buildings and a road, no visible text or signage

DRIVE ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

THINGS TO REMEMBER WHEN DRIVING

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

BREAKING-IN PERIOD

General information

Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other.

The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy.

Engine and axle drive

Always obey the official speed limit.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed:

▶ For gasoline engine, 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h.
▶ For diesel engine, 3,500 rpm and 93 mph/150 km/h.

Avoid full load or kickdown under all circumstances.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires

Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking-in period.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in period.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.

GENERAL DRIVING NOTES

Closing the tailgate

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing the tailgate - 1

Drive with the tailgate closed

Only drive with the tailgate closed; otherwise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road users may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter the passenger compartment.

If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided:

▶ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▶ Greatly increase the blower speed.

▶ Drive moderately.

Hot exhaust system

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hot exhaust system - 1

Hot exhaust system

High temperatures are generated in the Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle position mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal injury as well as property damage.

Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

Diesel particulate filter

The diesel particulate filter collects soot particles and burns them periodically at high temperatures.

During the cleaning time of several minutes, the following may occur:

▶ Temporarily, the engine may run less smoothly.
▶ Noises and a slight amount of smoke coming from the exhaust until shortly after the engine is shut down.
A somewhat higher engine speed is necessary to achieve the accustomed performance.

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Mobile communication devices in the vehicle - 1

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle

It is advised that you do not use mobile communication devices, e.g., mobile phones, inside the vehicle without connecting them directly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addition, there is no assurance that the radiation generated

during transmission will be discharged from the vehicle interior.

Hydroplaning

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface.

This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hydroplaning - 1

Hydroplaning

When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.

Driving through water

Drive through calm water only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 6 mph/10 km/h.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Driving through water - 1

Adhere to water depth and speed limitations

Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.

Braking safely

Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a standard feature.

Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is necessary.

The vehicle maintains steering responsiveness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode.

Objects in the area around the pedals

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Objects in the area around the pedals - 1

No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident.

Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.

Driving in wet conditions

When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles.

Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users.

The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads.

In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it.

Hills

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, resulting in a reduction in the brake system efficiency.

You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hills - 1

Avoid load on the brakes

Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hills - 2

Do not drive in neutral

Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are unavailable with the engine stopped.

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are furthered by:

▶ Low mileage.
▶ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all.
▶ Infrequent use of the brakes.

Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that generally cannot be corrected.

Condensation under the parked vehicle

When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops that exits underneath the vehicle.

Traces of water under the vehicle like this are normal.

Ground clearance

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Ground clearance - 1

Limited ground clearance

Observe the limited ground clearance of the vehicle, e. g. while entering underground parking garages or when driving over obstacles. Otherwise, damages to the vehicle may result.

LOADING

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

HINTS

MINI Hardtop (2014) - HINTS - 1

Overloading the vehicle

To avoid exceeding the approved carrying capacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - HINTS - 2

No fluids in the trunk

Make sure that fluids do not leak into the trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - HINTS - 3

Heavy and hard objects

Do not stow any heavy and hard objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneuvers.

DETERMINING THE LOAD LIMIT

Close-up of a car's front and side panels showing structural elements (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the vehicle and unstable driving situations may result.

  1. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

  2. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.

  3. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs.

  1. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

LOAD

+ + + ≤ Max. Load + + ≤ Max. Load + + ≤ Max. Load

The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

STOWING CARGO

▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
▶ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests.
▶ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.
▶ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests.

SECURING CARGO

Lashing eyes in the cargo area
2 2 1 2 3 1 2

Without storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes, arrow 1, in the cargo area.

With storage compartment package: to secure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, arrows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.

Securing cargo

▶ Smaller and lighter items: secure with retaining straps or with draw straps.
▶ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps.

Attach the cargo straps, retaining straps or draw straps to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.

Securing cargo Stow and secur

Stow and secure the cargo as described above; otherwise it may present a danger to the occupants, e.g., during braking and avoidance maneuvers.

ROOF-MOUNTED LUGGAGE RACK

Note

Installation only possible with roof rack.

Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing

Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack.

Loading

Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

Therefore, note the following when loading and driving:

Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight.

▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.

The roof load should not be too large in area.

▶ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.

▶ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps.

Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate.

▶ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

REAR LUGGAGE RACK

General information

Installation only possible with rear luggage rack preparation.

Rear racks are available as special accessories.

Note

Follow the installation instructions of the rear luggage rack.

Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.

Securing

COOPER/COOPER D
1 2 1 2

COOPER S
Top-down view of a car's rear bumper with numbered arrows indicating structural components or parts.

The anchorage points, arrow 1, and the socket, arrow 2, are located below the covers in the bumper.

Remove the covers before installing the rear luggage rack.

Power consumption

The consumption of the rear luggage rack lamps must not exceed the following values:

▶ Turn signals: 42 watts per side.
▶ Tail lamps: 50 watts per side.
▶ Brake lamps: 84 watts in total.
▶ Rear fog lamps: 42 watts in total.
▶ Backup lamp: 42 watts in total.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Power consumption - 1

Function of tail lamps

Before starting to drive, check that the

tail lamps of the rear luggage rack are functioning properly; otherwise, there is a risk of endangering other road users.

SAVING FUEL

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Fuel consumption depends on a number of different factors.

The implementation of certain measures, driving style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the environmental impact.

REMOVE UNNECESSARY CARGO

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

REMOVE ATTACHED PARTS FOLLOWING USE

Remove roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use.

Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

CLOSE THE WINDOWS AND GLASS SUNROOF

Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and raises fuel consumption.

TIRES

General information

Tires can affect fuel consumption values in various ways, for instance fuel consumption can be influenced by the size of the tires.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly

Check and, if necessary, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip.

Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling resistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear.

DRIVE AWAY WITHOUT DE- LAY

Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.

This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

LOOK WELL AHEAD WHEN DRIVING

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.

By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you.

Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption.

AVOID HIGH ENGINE SPEEDS

Use 1st gear to get the vehicle in motion. Beginning with 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds.

When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a constant speed.

As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.

The gear shift indicator, refer to page 76, of your vehicle indicates the most fuel efficient gear.

USE COASTING CONDITIONS

When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt.

On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll.

The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.

SWITCH OFF THE ENGINE DURING LONGER STOPS

Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop.

If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running constantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine.

In addition, fuel consumption is also determined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors.

SWITCH OFF ANY FUNCTIONS THAT ARE NOT CURRENTLY NEEDED

Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and consume additional fuel, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic.

Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed.

HAVE MAINTENANCE CARRIED OUT

Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. Have the maintenance carried out by your service center.

Please also note the MINI Maintenance System, refer to page 186.

GREEN MODE

The concept

The GREEN mode supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the engine control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate control output, are adjusted.

In cars with automatic transmission:

The Coasting driving condition is enabled under certain conditions.

Under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission in selector lever position D. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel

consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged. An indicator provides information about the distance traveled in Coasting mode.

In addition, context-sensitive instructions can be displayed that assist in driving in a manner that optimizes fuel consumption.

The extension of the range that is achieved as a result can be displayed in the instrument cluster.

At a glance

The system includes the following MINIMALISM functions and displays:

▷ GREEN bonus range, refer to page 158
▷ GREEN tips driving instruction, refer to page 158
▷ GREEN climate control, refer to page 157
▶ MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to page 160
▶ Coasting driving condition, refer to page 159

Activating GREEN mode

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Activating GREEN mode - 1

Turn Driving Dynamics Control to the right until GREEN mode is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring GREEN mode

Via the Driving Dynamics Control

  1. Activating GREEN mode.
  2. "Configure GREEN"
  3. Configure the program.

Via onboard monitor:

  1. "Settings"
  2. "GREEN Mode"
    Or

  3. 🔔 "Settings"

  4. "Driving mode"

3. "Configure GREEN"

Configure the program.

GREEN tip

▷ "Tip at:",

Set the GREEN mode speed at which a GREEN mode tip is to be displayed.

▷ "GREEN speed warning":

A reminder is displayed if the set GREEN mode speed is exceeded.

Coasting

Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and Coasting, refer to page 159, with the engine idling.

This function is only available in GREEN mode.

GREEN climate control

"GREEN climate control"

The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-efficient.

By making a slight change to the set temperature, or adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the passenger compartment fuel consumption can be economized.

The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior mirror heating are also reduced.

The exterior mirror heating is made available when outside temperatures are very cold.

GREEN potential

The percentage of potential savings that can be achieved with the current configuration is displayed.

Display in the instrument cluster

GREEN bonus range

MINI Hardtop (2014) - GREEN bonus range - 1

An extension of the range can be achieved by an adjusted driving style.

This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument clus-

ter.

The bonus range is shown in the range display.

The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

▷ Green display: efficient driving style.

▶ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal.

Driving style

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Driving style - 1

In the instrument cluster, a mark in the bar display indicates the current efficiency of the driving style.

Mark in the left area, arrow 1:

display for energy recovered by coasting or when braking.

Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display when accelerating.

The efficiency of the driving style is shown by the color of the bar:

▷ Green display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the green range.

▶ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal.

The display switches to green as soon as all conditions for fuel-economy-optimized driving are met.

GREEN tip driving instruction

D GREEN + 46.8 km

The instruction indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance.

Note

The driving style display and GREEN mode tips in the instrument cluster appear when the GREEN mode display is activated.

Activating driving style and GREEN mode tips:

  1. 🔔 "Settings"
  2. "Instr. cluster display"
  3. "GREEN Info"

GREEN tip symbols

An additional symbol and a text instruction are displayed.

Symbol Measure

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Measure - 1

For efficient driving style, back off the accelerator or delay accelerating to allow time to assess road conditions.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Measure - 2

Reduce speed to the selected GREEN speed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Measure - 3

Automatic transmission: switch from S/M to D or avoid manual shift interventions.

Symbol Measure

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Measure - 1

Manual shift transmission: follow shifting instructions.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Symbol Measure - 2

Manual shift transmission: engage neutral for engine stop.

Indications on the Control Display

MINIMALISM

Information on fuel consumption and technology can be displayed during driving.

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "MINIMALISM"

Displaying MINIMALISM info

The current efficiency can be displayed.

工 "MINIMALISM info"

The following systems are displayed:
▶ Automatic engine Start/Stop function.
▶ Energy recovery.
▶ Climate control output.
▶ Coasting.

Displaying GREEN mode tips

i "GREEN Tips"

Driving instruction and an additional symbol are displayed.

The setting is stored for the profile currently in use.

Coasting

The concept

The system helps to conserve fuel.

To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission when selector lever position D is engaged. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine

idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector lever position D remains engaged.

This driving condition is referred to as coasting.

As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again.

Hints

Coasting is a component of the GREEN mode, refer to page 156, driving mode.

Coasting is automatically activated when GREEN mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 108.

The function is available in a certain speed range.

A forward-looking driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.

Safety mode

The function is not available if one of the following conditions is satisfied.

▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
- Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades.
▶ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing excessive current.
▶ Cruise control activated.

Functional requirements

In GREEN mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, approx. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are satisfied:

▶ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated.
The selector lever is in transmission position D.
▶ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature.

Display

Display in the instrument cluster

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Display in the instrument cluster - 1

The mark in the bar display below the tachometer is highlighted green and appears at the zero point. The tachometer approximately indicates idle speed.

Indications on the Control Display

The Coasting driving condition is displayed in MINIMALISM Info while this driving mode is active.

The distance traveled in the Coasting driving condition is indicated by a counter.

MINIMALISM 1250 1 2

Color code green, arrow 1: distance traveled in the Coasting driving condition. Symbol, arrow 2: coasting driving condition.

Displaying MINIMALISM info

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "MINIMALISM"
  3. "MINIMALISM info"

Deactivating the system manually

The function can be deactivated in the Configure GREEN mode, refer to page 157, menu, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when traveling downhill.

The setting is saved for the profile currently being used.

MINIMALISM driving style analysis

The concept

The system helps in this situation to develop an especially efficient driving style and to conserve fuel.

For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display.

Using this indication, the individual driving style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.

The last fifteen minutes of a trip are evaluated.

The range of the vehicle can be extended by an efficient driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display.

Functional requirement

The function is only available in GREEN mode.

Calling up MINIMALISM Analyser

Via the Driving Dynamics Control

  1. Activate GREEN mode.
  2. "MINIMALISM"
  3. Select the symbol.

Display

Display on the Control Display

graph TD A["Start"] --> B{Condition} B -->|Yes| C["Car with fish icon"] B -->|No| D["Star Rating 2"] D --> E["Final Value: +1234"] E --> F["End"]

The display of the MINIMALISM Analyser consists of a fish, which is riding along in a glass of water on the roof of the MINI and a table of values that rates the driving style in various cat-

egories. The bonus range achieved by driving style that minimizes fuel consumption is displayed below the table of values.

The fish and the movements of the water in the glass symbolize the efficiency of the driving style. The more efficient the driving style, the less the water sloshes around in the glass and the better is the fish's mood, refer to arrow 1.

The table of values includes asterisks, refer to arrow 2. The more efficient the driving style, the more stars are included in the table and the faster the bonus range increases, refer to arrow 3.

If by contrast the driving style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the mood of the fish is sullied and a reduced number of asterisks is displayed.

To assist with an efficient driving style, GREEN tips are displayed during the drive.

Tips about the energy saving driving style, Con-serving fuel, refer to page 155.

Black and white photo of a curved highway with motion blur, framed by a purple border (no text or symbols visible)

MOVE ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

REFUELING

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

GENERAL INFORMATION

MINI Hardtop (2014) - GENERAL INFORMATION - 1

Refuel promptly

Refuel no later than at a range of

30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.

Diesel engines

The filler neck is designed for refueling at diesel fuel pumps.

FUEL CAP

Opening

  1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge and open it.

Close-up of a car's side panel showing a white right-pointing arrow on a circular button (no text or symbols)

  1. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

Close-up of a car's door handle with a white arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

  1. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap.

Close-up of a car's front wheel assembly with a white arrow pointing to the component (no text or symbols visible)

Closing

  1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.

  2. Close the fuel filler flap.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing - 1

Do not pinch the retaining strap

Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

In the event of an electrical malfunction, for example.

Close-up of a car door handle with a white arrow pointing to a button (no text or symbols visible)

Remove the cover.

Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol.

This releases the fuel filler flap.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN REFUELING

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN REFUELING - 1

Do not overfill the fuel tank

Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise

fuel may escape, causing harm to the environment and damaging the vehicle.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN REFUELING - 2

Handling fuels

Obey safety regulations posted at the gas

station.

FUEL

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

General fuel quality

Even fuels that conform to the specifications can be of low quality. This may cause engine problems, for instance poor engine starting behavior, poor handling and/or performance. Switch gas stations or use a brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.

Gasoline

For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Gasoline - 1

Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without metallic additives.

Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gasoline with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other components.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling.

Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards:

US: ASTM 4806-xx

CAN: CGSB-3.511-xx

xx: comply with the current standard in each case.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Gasoline - 2

Do not use a fuel with a higher percentage of ethanol

Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol percentage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, i.e. no Flex Fuel, otherwise this could damage the engine and fuel supply system.

MINI recommends AKI 91.

Minimum fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 89.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Minimum fuel grade - 1

Minimum fuel grade

Do not use any gasoline below the minimum fuel grade as this may impair engine performance.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Minimum fuel grade - 2

Fuel quality

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retailers.

Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled maintenance.

MINI recommends BP fuels

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Minimum fuel grade - 3

WHEELS AND TIRES

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

Safety information

The tire characteristics and tire inflation pressure influence the following:

The service life of the tires.
Road safety.
▶ Driving comfort.

Checking the pressure

Tires have a natural, consistent loss of pressure.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Checking the pressure - 1

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.

Tires heat up during driving, and the tire inflation pressure increases along with the temperature of the tire. The tire inflation pressure specifications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours.

The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi.

For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.

For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

▶ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
▶ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Checking the inflation pressure of the compact wheel

Close-up of a car's front wheel and side brackets, showing mechanical components and a white arrow pointing to a specific part (no text or symbols visible)

Located behind the bumper on the underside of the vehicle is an opening for checking the tire inflation pressure.

Pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 169, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. Pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center.

To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following:

▶ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
▶ Maximum permitted driving speed.

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 169, and adjust as necessary.

Close-up of a car's front and side panels showing structural components (no visible text or symbols)

These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h - 2

Maximum permissible speed

Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; otherwise, tire damage and accidents may result.

Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

Silhouette of a car with four human silhouettes above it and a small box on the side (no text or symbols)

175/65 R 15 84 H 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35 Std

175/65 R 15 84 H M +S A/S Std

195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC

195/55 R 16 87 W RSC

205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC

205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC

175/65 R 15 84 H M +S Std

175/60 R 16 86 H M +S XL RSC

195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC

205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC

Compact wheel Speed up to a max. of T 115/70 R 15 90 M 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60

COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC2.6 / 38 2.4 / 35
205/45 R 17 88 W XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC

Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h - 1

Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.

Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h

COOPER

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI
Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
Silhouette of a car with human silhouettes and a cargo box, no text or symbols present

175/65 R 15 84 H Std2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S A/S Std
195/55 R 16 87 V M+S A/S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 WRSC
205/45 R 17 88 W XLRSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XLRSC
175/65 R 15 84 H M+S Std
175/60 R 16 86 H M+S XL RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M+S XL RSC
Compact wheelSpeed up to a max. of
T 115/70 R 15 90 M50 mph / 80 km/h
4.2 / 60

COOPER S

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 W RSC2.8 / 41 2.6 / 38
195/55 R 16 87 V M +S A/S RSC
195/55 R 16 87 H M +S RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL A/S RSC3.1 / 45 2.9 /42
205/45 R 17 88 V XL RSC
205/40 R 18 86 W XL RSC
175/60 R 16 86 H M +S XL RSC
205/45 R 17 88 V M +S XL RSC

TIRE IDENTIFICATION MARKS

Tire size

205/45 R 17 84 V

205: nominal width in mm

45: aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

17: rim diameter in inches

84: load rating, not for ZR tires

V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires

Speed letter

T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0814

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0814: tire age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

DOT ... 0814: the tire was manufactured in the 8th week of 2014.

Recommendation

Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded

  1. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Temperature - 1

Temperature grade for this tire

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

If necessary, have the vehicle towed.

RSC - Run-flat tires

Run-flat tires, refer to page 175, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall.

M+S

Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires.

TIRE TREAD

Summer tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.

Winter tires

Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm.

Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation.

Minimum tread depth

Abstract 3D rendering of layered geometric structures with no visible text or symbols

Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.

They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.

TIRE DAMAGE

General information

Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

Hints

Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires.

Indications of tire damage or other vehicle defects:

▶ Unusual vibrations during driving.

▶ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

In case of tire damage

If there are indications of tire damage, reduce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident.

Drive carefully to the nearest service center. Have the vehicle towed or transported there. Otherwise, tire damage can become life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other road users.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Repair of tire damage

For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be replaced. Otherwise, damage can occur as a result.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Mounting

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Mounting - 1

Information on mounting tires

Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

Wheel and tire combination

Information on the correct wheel-tire combination and rim versions for your vehicle can be obtained from your service center.

Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer.

Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Wheel and tire combination - 1

Approved wheels and tires

You should only use wheels and tires that have been approved by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, for example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents

The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot evaluate non-approved wheels and tires to determine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehicle if they are mounted.

Close-up of a weather tire with a star marking on its side (no text or symbols visible)

For each tire size, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall.

With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling.

New tires

Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breaking-in period.

Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

The manufacturer of your vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Retreaded tires - 1

Retreaded tires

Possibly substantial variations in the design and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.

Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Maximum speed of winter tires - 1

Maximum speed for winter tires

Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire damage and accidents can occur.

Run-flat tires

If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Rotating wheels between axles

Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions.

The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct if necessary.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible.

Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

RUN-FLAT TIRES

Label

Close-up of a car tire with a visible 'RSC' logo on the wheel (no text or symbols beyond logo)

RSC label on the tire sidewall.

The wheels are composed of tires that are self-supporting to a limited degree.

The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss.

Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 99.

Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 96.

Changing run-flat tires

For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

REPAIRING A FLAT TIRE

MINI Hardtop (2014) - REPAIRING A FLAT TIRE - 1

Safety measures in case of a breakdown

Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.

Switch on the hazard warning system.

Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance.

Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

MOBILITY SYSTEM

The concept

With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped into the tires, which seals the damage from the inside.

The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure.

Hints

▶ Follow the instructions on using the Mobility System found on the compressor and sealant bottle.
▶ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx. 1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▶ Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▶ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire.
▶ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant bottle and apply it to the steering wheel.
The use of a tire sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if necessary.

Storage

The Mobility System is located under the cargo floor panel in the cargo area.

Sealant bottle

Diagram showing a cable being inserted into a cylindrical device, labeled with step 1 and step 2 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

▶ Sealant bottle, arrow 1.
▶ Filling hose, arrow 2.

Note the use-by date on the sealant bottle.

Compressor

Labeled diagram of a medical or laboratory device with numbered components including a central box, connectors, and cable.

1 On/off switch
2 Holder for bottle
3 Reduce inflation pressure
4 Inflation pressure dial
5 Compressor
6 Connector/cable for socket
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom of the compressor

Filling the tire with sealant

  1. Shake the sealant bottle.

3D rendered mechanical component with a vertical double-headed arrow indicating upward motion (no text or symbols)

  1. Take the connection hose completely out of the compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.

Diagram showing a car wheel connected to a device with cables, no text or symbols present

  1. Attach the connection hose to the connector of the sealing bottle, ensuring that it engages audibly.

Diagram showing a car wheel connected to a sensor device and a battery, with an arrow pointing to the sensor component (no text or symbols present)

  1. Slide the sealing bottle upright into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it engages audibly.

Diagram showing a car wheel connected to a sensor device with an arrow indicating the component (no text or symbols present)

  1. Screw the connection hose onto the valve of the defective wheel.

Illustration of a tire and a mechanical device with cable, no visible text or symbols

  1. With the compressor switched off, insert the plug into a power socket inside the vehicle.

Illustration of a handheld electronic device with a coiled cable (no text or symbols visible)

  1. With the ignition turned on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.

3D rendered mechanical component with internal channels and a rectangular housing (no text or symbols visible)

Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor in this phase.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Filling the tire with sealant - 8

Enclosed areas

Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Enclosed areas - 1

Switch off the compressor after 10 minutes

Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.

If a tire pressure of 2 bar is not reached:

  1. Switch off the compressor.
  2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
  3. Drive forward and back to distribute the sealant in the tire.

  4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. If an inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your service center.

Stowing the Mobility System

  1. Disconnect the connection hose of the sealant bottle from the wheel.
  2. Disconnect the connection hose from the sealant bottle.
  3. Wrap the empty sealant bottle and connection hose in suitable material to avoid dirtying the cargo area.
  4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive to ensure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of .

Do not drop below if possible.

Correcting the tire inflation pressure

  1. Stop at a suitable location.
  2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire valve stem.

Illustration of a film reel connected to an electronic device with cable, no text or symbols present

  1. Attach the connection hose directly to the compressor.

Illustration of a medical device with a white cable inserted into the internal cavity (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Insert the connector into a power socket inside the vehicle.

Illustration of a handheld electronic device with a coiled cable (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Correct the tire inflation pressure to 2.5 bar.

▶ Increase pressure: with the ignition turned on or the engine running, switch on the compressor.
To reduce the pressure: press the button on the compressor.

Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 97.

Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 94.

Replace the defective tire and the sealant bottle of the Mobility System as soon as possible.

SNOW CHAINS

Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of your vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved.

Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center.

Use

Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size:

175/65 R 15.

175/60 R 16.

Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions.

Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed according to the chain manufacturer's instructions.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings.

When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary.

Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

IMPORTANT FEATURES IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

2 3 4 5 MINI MINI 1

1 Washer fluid reservoir
2 Vehicle identification number
3 Oil filler neck

4 Jump-starting, positive terminal
5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
6 Coolant reservoir

HOOD

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Working in the engine compartment

Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.

If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guidelines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center.

If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Never reach into the engine compartment

Never reach into the intermediate spaces or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 3

Fold down wiper arm

Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms are against the windshield, or this may result in damage.

Opening the hood

  1. Pull lever in the interior, arrow.

Hood is unlocked

Close-up of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

  1. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow.

Hood can be opened.

Indicator/warning lamps

When the hood is opened, a Check Control message is displayed.

Closing the hood

Close-up of a car's grille and headlight with a white arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols visible)

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing the hood - 2

Hood open when driving

If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over immediately and close it securely.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Closing the hood - 3

Danger of pinching

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.

ENGINE OIL

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Engine oil consumption depends on driving style and driving conditions, e.g., if your driving style is very sporty engine oil consumption will be considerably greater.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling.

The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement.

The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles.

▶ Status display
▶ Detailed measurement

CHECKING THE OIL LEVEL ELECTRONICALLY

Status display

The concept

The oil level is monitored electronically during driving and shown on the Control Display.

If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed.

With frequent short-distance trips, perform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the oil level

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Engine oil level"

Oil level display messages

Different messages appear on the display depending on the oil level. Pay attention to these messages.

If the engine oil level is too low, within the next 125 miles/200 km add oil, refer to page 183.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Oil level display messages - 1

Engine oil level too low

Add oil immediately; otherwise, an insufficient amount of engine oil could result in engine damage.

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Oil level display messages - 2

Too much engine oil

Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine damage.

Detailed measurement

The concept

In the detailed measurement the oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

If the oil level reaches the minimum level or an overfilling is detected, a check control message is displayed.

During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Requirements

▶ Vehicle is on level road.
▶ Manual transmission: shift lever in neutral position, clutch and accelerator pedals not depressed.
▶ Automatic transmission: selector lever in transmission position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
▶ Engine is running and is at operating temperature.

Performing a detailed measurement

In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level:

  1. "Vehicle Info"
  2. "Vehicle status"
  3. "Measure engine oil level"
  4. "Start measurement"

The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Duration: approx. 1 minute.

ADDING ENGINE OIL

General information

Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehicle before engine oil is added.

Filler neck

Close-up of a circular object with an arrow pointing upward, no visible text or symbols

Only replenish the maximum oil amount of 1 US quart/liter if the signal is displayed in the instrument cluster.

After refilling, perform a detailed measurement, refer to page 183.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Filler neck - 2

Adding oil

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km.

Otherwise, the engine may be damaged.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Filler neck - 3

Do not add too much engine oil

When too much engine oil is added, immediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Filler neck - 4

Protect children

Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of children and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.

OIL TYPES FOR REFILLING

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

No oil additives

Oil additives may lead to engine dam-

age.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Viscosity grades for engine oils

When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and

SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Approved oil types

You can add oils with the following specifications:

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01

BMW Longlife-01 FE

Additional information about the approved types of oils can be requested from the service center.

Alternative oil types

If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be added:

Gasoline engine

API SM or superior grade specification

ENGINE OIL CHANGE:

The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the service center change the motor oil.

MINI RECOMMENDS

MINI Hardtop (2014) - ENGINE OIL CHANGE: - 1

COOLANT

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

GENERAL INFORMATION

MINI Hardtop (2014) - GENERAL INFORMATION - 1

Danger of burns from hot engine

Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - GENERAL INFORMATION - 2

Suitable additives

Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your vehicle. Ask your service center for suitable additives.

COOLANT LEVEL

Checking

There are yellow Min and Max marks in the coolant reservoir.

  1. Let the engine cool.

  2. Turn the coolant reservoir lid counterclockwise to unscrew and open it.

Close-up of a mechanical engine compartment with a circular arrow indicating a component (no visible text or symbols)

  1. The coolant level is correct when it is between these two marks.

Adding

  1. Let the engine cool.

  2. Turn the coolant reservoir lid counterclockwise to unscrew and open it.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a circular arrow indicating rotation or adjustment (no visible text or symbols)

  1. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.

  2. Turn the cap.

  3. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

DISPOSAL

MINI Hardtop (2014) - DISPOSAL - 1

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

MAINTENANCE

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

CONDITION BASED SERVICE CBS

Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service determines the maintenance requirements.

The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile.

Detailed information on service requirements, refer to page 76, can be displayed on the Control Display.

Service data in the remote control

Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle.

Therefore, hand your service specialist the remote control that you used most recently.

Storage periods

Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account.

If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.

SERVICE AND WARRANTY INFORMATION BOOKLET FOR US MODELS AND WARRANTY AND SERVICE GUIDE BOOKLET FOR CANADIAN MODELS

Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service requirements.

Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have regular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries are proof of regular maintenance.

SOCKET FOR OBD ONBOARD DIAGNOSIS

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Socket for Onboard Diagnosis

The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a workshop that operates in accordance with the

specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.

Position

Interior view of a car dashboard and steering wheel (no visible text or symbols)

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehicle emissions.

Emissions

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Emissions - 1

The warning lamp lights up:

Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Canadian model: warning light indicates the engine symbol.

The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

REPLACING COMPONENTS

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

ONBOARD VEHICLE TOOL KIT

Close-up of a mechanical component with a central square opening and internal cutouts (no visible text or symbols)

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the trough under the cargo area floor.

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate trim.

WIPER BLADE REPLACEMENT

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades

Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.

Replacing the wiper blades

  1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
  2. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.

Abstract 3D rendering of a thin pipe with a white arrow pointing upward, against a black background (no text or symbols)

  1. Pull the wiper blade first downward out of the holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1. Then pull the wiper blade free from the holder of the wiper arm, arrow 2.

Diagram showing a mechanical or structural component with labeled directional arrows (1 and 2) indicating movement or force.

  1. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in reverse order.

  2. Fold down the wipers.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Replacing the wiper blades - 3

Folding down wipers before opening the hood

Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.

Replace the rear wiper blade

  1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
  2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back.

3D rendering of a wind turbine blade with a curved arrow indicating rotational motion (no text or symbols)

  1. Continue turning the wiper blade all the way so that it pops out of the holder.
  2. Press the new wiper blade into the holder until you hear it snap into place.
  3. Fold the wipers in.

LAMP AND BULB REPLACE- MENT

Hints

Lamps and bulbs

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here.

You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Lamps and bulbs - 1

Danger of burns

Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Lamps and bulbs - 2

Working on the lighting system

When working on the lighting system, you should always switch off the lights affected to prevent short circuits.

To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Lamps and bulbs - 3

Do not touch the bulbs

Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life.

Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover as a light source.

These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) - 1

Do not remove the covers

Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.

Headlamp glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the external lamps in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlamp glasses do not need to be changed.

If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this.

Front lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

Halogen headlamps
1 2

1 Low beams/high beams
2 Turn signal

LED headlamps
1 2 3

1 Daytime running lights
2 Low beams/high beams
3 Turn signal

Bug light
1 2 3

1 Parking lamps
2 Daytime running lights
3 Fog lamps

LED bug light
Close-up of a mechanical component with labeled parts (1 and 2), showing internal structure without any readable text or symbols.

1 Parking lamps
2 Fog lamps

Low beams/high beams

Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 189.

Bulbs: H4

  1. Open the hood, refer to page 181.
  2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove.

Close-up of a mechanical assembly with a white arrow indicating a component (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Pull off the connector.

Close-up of a mechanical component with circular opening and internal mechanism (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Unclip spring clip, arrow 1, and fold down.
  2. Remove the bulb from the headlamp housing.
  3. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

Turn signal

Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 189.

Bulbs: PW24W

With white turn signal lamps: PWY24W

  1. Turn the steering wheel.
  2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 1, and remove.

Close-up of a car tire with two circular buttons and directional arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

  1. Unscrew the inner cap counterclockwise, and remove it.

Close-up of a car tire wheel with a circular arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

  1. Pull bulb socket out of the bulb housing; if necessary, loosen it with small tilting movements if possible.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a central connector and circular housing (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.
  2. Insert the new bulb and install the cover in the reverse order.

Parking lamps/fog lamps/daytime running lights

Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 189.

Bulbs:

▶ Parking lamps for halogen headlamps: W5W

Parking lamps for LED headlamps: W5W NBV

Daytime running light: PSX24W
Fog lamp: H8

  1. Turn the steering wheel.

  2. Turn the lid counterclockwise, arrow 2, and remove.

Close-up of a car tire and its rear wheel with circular arrows indicating rotation (no text or symbols)

  1. Remove the corresponding connector.
  2. ▷ Remove bulb socket of the parking lamp, arrow 1, by turning it counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb out of the fixture.

Remove the bulb socket of the daytime running lights, arrow 2, by pressing together the top and bottom latch mechanism.

For better accessibility, if necessary, remove the bulb of the fog lamp beforehand.

▶ Turn the bulb socket of the fog lamp counterclockwise, arrow 3, and remove.

1 2 3

  1. Insert the new bulbs and install the cover in the reverse order.

When installing the daytime running lights, audibly latch the bulb socket first at the bottom, then at the top.

Tail lamps, bulb replacement

At a glance

Vehicles with a rear fog lamp

1 2 3 4

1 Side tail lamps
2 Rear fog lamp
3 License plate lamp
4 High brake lights

Vehicle with two rear fog lamps

1 2 3 4 1 2

1 Side tail lamps
2 Rear fog lamps
3 License plate lamp
4 High brake lights

Side tail lamps

Diagram of a car's front panel with numbered labels pointing to the key components.

1 Brake lights/tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights

Side LED tail lamps

1 2 1 3

1 Brake lights/tail lights
2 Turn signal
3 Reversing lights

Side tail lamps

Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 189.

Bulbs: P21W

  1. Open the tailgate., refer to page 39
  2. Remove left or right cover.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow symbol pointing right (no text or symbols present)

  1. Through the opening, loosen the plug connector, arrow 2 on the bulb holder.

Push apart the latches, arrows 1, and remove the bulb holder.

1 1 2

  1. Remove the bulb holder from the opening.
  2. Press the defective bulb gently into the socket, turn clockwise and remove.

▶ Arrow 1: brake lights/tail lights
▶ Arrow 2: turn signal
▶ Arrow 3: reversing light

1 2 1 3

  1. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and attach the bulb holder. Make sure that the bulb holder engages in all fasteners.

Central brake lamp and license plate lamp

Follow the general instructions on lamps and bulbs, refer to page 189.

The lamps feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Vehicles with a rear fog lamp

Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 189.

Bulbs: W16W

  1. On vehicles with heat shield: Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

Mechanical assembly diagram showing three white arrows pointing upward to a component (no text or symbols present)

  1. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog lamp.
  2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a feature, no visible text or symbols

  1. Replace defective bulb.
  2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Vehicle with two rear fog lamps

Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 189.

Bulbs: W16W

Left rear fog lamp:

  1. On vehicles with heat shield:

Loosen 3 screws, arrow.

Close-up of a car's lower body with three white arrows pointing to a vehicle wheel (no text or symbols)

  1. Push the heat shield forward and the bumper back in order to be able to reach the fog lamp.

  2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

Close-up of a car's lower suspension system with an arrow pointing to the vehicle wheel (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Replace defective bulb.

  2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Right fog lamp:

  1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

The wire is long enough to guide the socket down and through between any heat shield that may be installed and the bumper.

Close-up of a vehicle's lower body and side panel showing structural components (no text or symbols visible)

  1. Replace defective bulb.

  2. To install the new bulb, proceed in reverse order of removal.

Side turn signal, bulb replacement

Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 189.

Bulbs:

▶ With orange lens: W5W

▶ With white lens: WY5W diadem

  1. Push turn signal housing up and pull out at the bottom.

Close-up of a car door with a white upward arrow and stripes on the side (no text or symbols)

  1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

Close-up of a car's electrical plug and cable (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Replace the bulb.

  2. Proceed in the reverse order to insert the new bulb and install the turn signal housing.

First hook the turn signal housing to the bottom, then at the top press it into the latch.

CHANGING WHEELS

Hints

The vehicle equipment does not include a spare tire.

When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.

The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center.

Jacking points for the vehicle jack

Side view of a car wheel and side panel with two white arrows pointing upward (no text or symbols)

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are located at the positions shown.

Compact wheel

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Safety measures in case of a breakdown or a wheel change

Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning system.

▷ Set the parking brake, and engage first gear or transmission position P.

Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail.

If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp at an appropriate distance. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.

▶ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slippery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the side.

Do not place wood blocks or similar items under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot reach its carrying capacity because of the restricted height.

If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine; otherwise, a mortal hazard exists.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Use the vehicle jack only for changing wheels

Use the vehicle jack only for changing wheels Do not attempt to use it to jack up a different type of vehicle or loads of any kind; otherwise, this could cause material damage and personal injury.

Removing compact wheel

The compact wheel is housed in a well on the underbody of the vehicle. The screw connection of the compact wheel is located in the cargo area under the floor mat, on the floor of the storage compartment for the wheel changing set.

  1. Loosen the nut from the wheel change set using the wheel wrench.

Mechanical component with a white arrow indicating a directional change, no visible text or symbols

  1. Remove the retaining plate.

  2. Screw the wheel wrench on the threads and loosen the lock clockwise rotation. Compact wheel releases and must be held with the wheel wrench.

Black-and-white photo of a vehicle's front bumper with a hand pointing to the wheel (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Lower the compact wheel with the wheel wrench.

  2. Unscrewing the wheel wrench

  3. Pull out the well with compact wheel under the vehicle toward the rear.
  4. Remove the spacer and compact wheel of the well.
  5. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.

Prepare wheel change

  1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to page 196.
  2. With the wheel chock from the wheel change set, also secure the vehicle against rolling away at the front wheel of the opposite side.
  3. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn. Lug bolt lock, refer to page 198

Jacking up the vehicle

  1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point closest to the wheel such that the vehicle jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle jacking point with the entire surface on the ground.

Side view of a car showing two wheels with white arrows pointing upward (no text or symbols)

  1. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectangular recess of the jacking point for cranking it up.
  2. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts off of the ground.

Wheel mounting

  1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove the wheel.
  2. Put the new wheel or compact wheel on and screw in at least two bolts.
    If original MINI light alloy wheels are not mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also have to be used.
  3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
  4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle jack.

After the wheel change

  1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - After the wheel change - 1

Check for secure seating of the lug bolts

For safety reasons, have the secure seating of the lug bolts checked with a calibrated torque wrench; otherwise, a safety hazard results from incorrectly tightened lug bolts.

  1. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo area. The defective wheel cannot be stored in the compact wheel bracket because of its size.
  2. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
  3. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 98.

Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 95.

  1. Replace the damaged tires as soon as possible.

Driving with the compact wheel

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Driving with the compact wheel - 1

Watch the speed when driving with the compact wheel

Drive conservatively and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, changed driving characteristics such as reduced lane stability

while braking, extended braking distance and changed self-steering properties in the limit area.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Driving with the compact wheel - 2

Mounting only one compact wheel

Only a single compact wheel may be mounted. Reinstall wheels and tires of the original size as quickly as possible; otherwise, there is a safety risk.

Lug bolt lock

The adapter of the lug bolt lock is located in the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 188.

3D mechanical component diagram showing two parts with arrows indicating assembly or positioning (no text or symbols present)

▶ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
Adapter, arrow 2.

Removing

  1. Attach the adapter to the wheel lug.
  2. Unscrew the lug bolt.

Remove the adapter after screwing the lug bolt back on.

VEHICLE BATTERY

Maintenance

The battery is maintenance-free, i.e., the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery.

Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery.

Battery replacement

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Battery replacement - 1

Use approved vehicle batteries only

Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available.

After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available and that any Check Control messages are no longer displayed.

Charging the battery

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle

Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.

General information

Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life.

The battery may need to be charged in the following cases:

▷ When making frequent short-distance drives.
▶ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged periods, longer than a month.
▶ Automatic transmission: when parked for long periods of time in selector lever position D, R or N.

Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 202, in the engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure

After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized.

Individual settings need to be reprogrammed:

▷ Time: update.
Date: update.

Disposing of old batteries

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Disposing of old batteries - 1

Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recycling center.

Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

FUSES

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Replacing fuses

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.

Replacing fuse

The fuses are located in the passenger footwell under the dashboard.

  1. To open, loosen screws, arrow 1.

Interior view of a car dashboard with directional arrows and labeled parts (no readable text or symbols)

  1. Fold down the fuse holder, arrow 2.

Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet.

  1. Replace the fuse in question.
  2. The installation is done in reverse order from the removal.

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

HAZARD WARNING FLASH-ERS

Interior view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and dashboard (no visible text or symbols)

The button is located above the Control Display.

INTELLIGENT EMERGENCY REQUEST

Requirements

The radio ready state is switched on.

The Assist system is functional.

The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated.

General information

Only press the SOS button in an emergency.

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Emergency Request not guaranteed

For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

Initiating an Emergency Request

Top-down view of a car dashboard with steering wheel and control panel (no visible text or symbols)

  1. Press the cover briefly to open it.

  2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up.

The LED lights up: an Emergency Request was initiated.

If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established.

The LED flashes when a connection to the MINI Response Center has been established.

When the emergency request is received at the MINI Response Center, the MINI Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.

Even if you are unable to respond, the MINI Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances.

For this purpose, data that are used to determine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle if it can be established, are transmitted to the MINI Response Center.

▶ If the LED is flashing but the MINI Response Center cannot be heard on the speaker, the hands-free system may be malfunctioning. However, the MINI Response Center may still be able to hear you.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically

Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

WARNING TRIANGLE

Top-down view of a transparent plastic car intake tray with a black control panel and indicator lights (no text or symbols visible)

The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. To remove, loosen the brackets.

FIRST AID KIT

The first aid kit is located in the cargo area.

Some of the articles have a limited service life.

Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE

Service availability

Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain assis-

tance there in the event of a vehicle break- down.

JUMP-STARTING

Hints

If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following procedure.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Do not touch live parts

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.

Preparation

  1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This information can be found on the battery.
  2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
  3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Preparation - 1

Bodywork contact between vehicles

Make sure that there is no contact between the bodywork of the two vehicles; otherwise, there is the danger of short circuits.

Starting aid terminals

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Starting aid terminals - 1

Connecting order

Connect the jumper cables in the correct order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.

Close-up of a car engine bay with a white arrow pointing to a component (no visible text or symbols)

The so-called starting aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery's positive terminal.

Open the cap of the starting aid terminal.

Close-up of a mechanical component with a white arrow pointing to a small feature (no visible text or symbols)

The body ground acts as the negative terminal of the battery.

Connecting the cables

  1. Pull off the cap of the starting aid terminal.

  2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.

  3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.

  4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

  5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the

corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

  1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.

If the vehicle to be started has a diesel engine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes.

  1. Start the engine of the vehicle to be started in the usual way.

If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

  1. Let both engines run for several minutes.

  2. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.

Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

TOW-STARTING AND TOWING

Note

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Tow-starting and towing

When tow-starting and towing the vehicle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.

Switching off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to page 99.

Automatic transmission: transporting your vehicle

Note

Your vehicle must not be towed if the front wheels are touching the ground. Therefore,

contact a service center in the event of a break-down.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Note - 1

Tow the vehicle only with the front axle raised

Have the vehicle towed only with the front axle raised or transported on a loading platform; otherwise, damage may occur.

Tow truck

Three grayscale line drawings of a flatbed truck with no visible text, numbers, or symbols.

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Tow truck - 2

Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only.

Manual transmission

Observe before towing your vehicle

Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Towing

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Towing - 1

When the parking brake is blocked

The parking brake cannot be released manually.

Do not tow the vehicle with the parking brake blocked, or the vehicle can be damaged.

Contact your service center.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Towing - 2

Follow the towing instructions

Follow all towing instructions; otherwise, vehicle damage or accidents may occur.

Make sure that the ignition is switched on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lamps, turn signals, and windshield wipers may be unavailable.

Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle tilted, as the front wheels could turn.

When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. Consequently, more force needs to be applied when braking and steering.

▶ Larger steering wheel movements are required.

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle response.

Tow truck

Three grayscale line drawings of a flatbed truck with no visible text, numbers, or symbols.

Have your vehicle transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Tow truck - 2

Do not lift the vehicle

Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.

Towing other vehicles

General information

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 1

Light towing vehicle

The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle response.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - General information - 2

Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly

Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.

▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.
▶ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Tow bar

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following:

▶ Maneuvering capability is limited during cornering.
The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope

When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Tow rope - 1

Attaching the tow rope correctly

Only secure the tow rope on the tow fitting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.

Tow fitting

Top-down view of a car chassis interior showing internal compartments and structural elements (no text or symbols visible)

The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the MINI. It is located in the cargo area under the cargo floor panel in the onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 188.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Tow fitting - 2

Tow fitting, information on use

▶ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in.

▶ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only.
▶ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.

Screw thread

Side-by-side comparison of a car's front and side profiles, showing grille and dashboard details (no text or symbols)

Threaded holes for the tow fitting are located in the front and rear of the vehicle on the right side with respect to the direction of travel.

Push out the cover by pressing on the top edge.

Tow-starting

Automatic transmission

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting.

Have the cause of the starting difficulties remedied.

Manual transmission

If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but start the engine by jump-starting, refer to page 202. If the vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter, only tow-start while the engine is cold.

  1. Switch on the hazard warning system and comply with local regulations.
  2. Ignition, refer to page 59, on.
  3. Engage third gear.
  4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch pedal pressed and slowly release the pedal. After the engine starts, immediately press on the clutch pedal again.
  5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope, and switch off the hazard warning system.
  6. Have the vehicle checked.

CARE

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

CAR WASHES

Hints

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Steam jets or high-pressure washers

When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140° F/60 ° C.

If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is maintained. Holding them too close or using excessively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage.

Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 2

Cleaning sensors/cameras with high-pressure washers

When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

▶ Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised.

▶ Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter.

Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Automatic car washes

Hints

▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
▶ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms.
▶ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.
▶ Unscrew the rod antenna.
▶ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to page 65, to avoid unintentional wiper activation.
In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instructions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 43.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Hints - 1

Guide rails in car washes

Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.

Before driving into a car wash

In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps:

Manual transmission:

  1. Drive into the car wash.
  2. Shift to neutral.
  3. Switch the engine off.
  4. Switch on the ignition.

Automatic transmission:

  1. Drive into the car wash.
  2. Engage transmission position N.
  3. Press the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine.
    In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and two Check-Control messages are displayed.

A signal sounds when you leave the vehicle while in gear position N.

The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

To start the engine:

  1. Depress the brake pedal.
  2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Headlamps

Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caustic cleansers.
▶ Soak areas that have been soiled, e.g., due to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water.
- Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

After washing the vehicle

After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur.

Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

VEHICLE CARE

Car care products

MINI recommends using cleaning and care products from MINI, since these have been tested and approved.

Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container.

When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows.

Only use products intended for cleaning vehicles.

Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.

Vehicle paint

Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your car care to these influences.

Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface.

Suitable care products are available from the service center.

Upholstery material care

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner.

Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Upholstery material care - 1

Damage from Velcro® fasteners

Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.

Caring for special components

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 °F/60 °C. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean components such as the radiator grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, particularly when they have been exposed to road salt.

Rubber components

Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers.

When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping.

Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood facing and fine wood components only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

These include:

▷ Imitation leather surfaces.

▷ Headliner.

▷ Lamp lenses.

▷ Instrument cluster cover.

▶ Matte black spray-coated components.

▷ Painted parts in the interior.

Clean with a microfiber cloth.

Lightly dampen the cloth with water.

Do not soak the headliner.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Plastic components - 1

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents

Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.

Safety belts

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Safety belts - 1

Chemical cleaning

Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.

Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles.

Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Carpets and floor mats - 1

No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident.

Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects.

Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed for cleaning, for example.

Floor mats can be removed from the passenger compartment for cleaning.

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensors/cameras

To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.

Displays/Screens/Projection lenses

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Displays/Screens/Projection lenses - 1

Cleaning displays and screens

Do not use any chemical or household

cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be affected.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Displays/Screens/Projection lenses - 2

Keeping out moisture

Keep all fluids and moisture away from

the unit; otherwise, electrical components can be damaged.

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Displays/Screens/Projection lenses - 3

Avoid pressure

Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.

Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

For stubborn soiling on the projection lens of the Head-up Display, dampen the microfiber cloth with alcohol. Extending projection lens, refer to page 84.

Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Additional information is available from the service center.

Black-and-white photo of a pair of eyeglasses and a wallet on a dark surface, no text or symbols visible.

FIND ME.

AT A GLANCE

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

MOBILITY

REFERENCE

TECHNICAL DATA

VEHICLE EQUIPMENT

All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equipment

is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems.

DIMENSIONS

MINI
Width with mirrors inches/mm 76.1/1932
Width without mirrors inches/mm 68.0/1727
Height with roof antenna inches/mm 55.7/1414
Length inches/mm 151.1/3837
Cooper S: length inches/mm 151.9/3858
Wheelbase inches/mm 98.2/2495
Smallest turning circle diam. ft/m 35/10.8

WEIGHTS

The values preceding the slash apply to vehicles with manual transmission; the values following the slash apply to vehicles with automatic transmission.

MINI Cooper
Curb weight, road ready, with 75 kg load, with fuel tank 90 % full, without special equipmentlbs2605/2675
kg1182/1213
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs3455/3520
kg1567/1597
Load lbs680
kg305
Approved front axle load lbs1905/1975
kg864/896
Approved rear axle load lbs1665/1665
kg755/755
Approved roof load capacity lbs60
kg60
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 8.7/211
MINI Cooper S
Curb weight, road ready, with 75 kg load, with fuel tank 90 % full, without special equipmentlbs2760/2795
kg1252/1268
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs3620/3650
kg1642/1656
Load lbs770/775
kg349/352
Approved front axle load lbs2010/2045
kg912/928
Approved rear axle load lbs1690/1690
kg767/767
Approved roof load capacity lbs60
kg60
Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 8.7/211

CAPACITIES

MINI

Cooper: fuel tank US gal/liters 10.5/40

Fuel tank US gal/liters 11.6/44

APPENDIX

Any updates to the Owner's Handbook for Vehicle are listed here.

ADDITIONAL LICENSE TEXTS AND CERTIFICATIONS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Israel

A. The use of this product does not need a wireless operation license.
B. The product does not include an RF disturbance protection, and should not disturb other licensed products.
C. It is forbidden to replace the antenna or to make any change in this product.

Australia/New Zealand

MINI Hardtop (2014) - Australia/New Zealand - 1

N1374

Russia

C-DE-ML05.H01232

South Africa

ICASA

TA-2013/831

China

In accordance with the provisions on the Radio Regulations of the people's Republic of China, the radio transmission equipment, after examination, conforms to the provisions with its CMIIT ID: 2013DJ7376

EVERYTHING FROM A TO Z

INDEX

A

ABS, Antilock Brake System 106

ACC, Active Cruise Control 110

Acceleration Assistant, refer to Launch Control 70

Accessories and parts 7

Activated-charcoal filter 132

Active cruise control, ACC 110

Additives, oil 183

Adjusting the headlamps 89

Adjustments, seats/head re- straints 47

Adjustments, steering wheel 54

After washing vehicle 208

Airbags 91

Airbags, indicator/warning light 92

Air circulation, refer to Recirculated-air mode 128, 131

Air conditioner 127

Air, dehumidifying, refer to Cooling function 128, 131

Air distribution, manual 128, 130

Air flow, air conditioner 128

Air flow, automatic climate control 130

Air pressure, tires 168

Air vents, refer to Ventilation 132

Alarm system 42

Alarm triggering 42

Alarm, unintentional 43

All around the center console 16

All around the headliner 17

All around the steering wheel 14

All-season tires, refer to Winter tires 174

Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 134

Alternative oil types 184

Antifreeze, washer fluid 66

Antilock Brake System, ABS 106

Anti-slip control, refer to DSC 106

Approved axle load 214

Approved engine oils 184

Arrival time 80

Ash tray 138

Assistance, Roadside Assistance 202

Assistance when driving off 109

Assist system, refer to Intelligent Safety 99

AUTO intensity 130

Automatic car wash 207

Automatic climate control 129

Automatic cruise control with Stop & Go 110

Automatic Curb Monitor 52

Automatic deactivation, front passenger airbags 93

Automatic headlamp control 87

Automatic locking 42

Automatic recirculated-air control 131

Automatic transmission with Steptronic 67

AUTO program, automatic climate control 130

AUTO program, intensity 130

Auto Start/Stop function 61

Average fuel consumption 79

Average speed 80

Axle loads, weights 214

B

Backrest curvature, refer to Lumbar support 48

Band-aids, refer to First aid kit 202

Bar for tow-starting/towing 205

Battery replacement, vehicle battery 199

Battery, vehicle 198

Belts, safety belts 49

Beverage holder, cu- pholder 142

Bonus range, GREEN mode 158

Bottle holder, refer to Cupholder 142

Brake assistant 106

Brake discs, breaking in 148

Brake pads, breaking in 148

Braking, hints 149

Breakdown assistance 201, 202

Breaking in 148

Brightness of Control Display 82

Bug light 190

Bulb replacement 189

Bulb replacement, front 190

Bulb replacement, rear 192

Bulb replacement, side 195

Bulbs and lamps 189

Button, RES 112

Button, Start/Stop 59

Bypassing, refer to Jump-starting 202

C

California Proposition 65 Warning 7

Camera-based cruise control, ACC 110

Camera, care 210

Camera, rearview cam- era 120

Can holder, refer to Cu-pholder 142

Car battery 198

Car care products 208

Care, displays 210

Care, vehicle 208

Cargo 151

Cargo area 138

Cargo area, adapting size 143

Cargo area, enlarging 139

Cargo area lid 39

Cargo area, storage compartments 143

Cargo cover 138

Cargo, securing 152

Cargo straps, securing cargo 152

Car key, refer to Remote control 34

Carpet, care 210

Car wash 207

Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 149

CBS Condition Based Service 186

Center armrest 142

Center console 16

Central screen, refer to Control Display 18

Changes, technical, refer to Safety 7

Changing parts 188

Changing wheels 196

Changing wheels/tires 173

Check Control 72

Children, seating position 55

Children, transporting safely 55

Child restraint fixing sys- tem 55

Child restraint fixing system LATCH 56

Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 55

Child seat, mounting 55

Child seats 55

Chrome parts, care 209

Cigarette lighter 138

Cleaning, displays 210

Climate control 127, 129

Clock 75

Closing/opening via door lock 38

Closing/opening with remote control 37

Clothes hooks 143

Coasting 159

Coasting with engine decoupled, coasting 159

Coasting with idling engine 159

Cold starting, refer to Starting the engine 60

Collision warning with City Braking function 100

Combination switch, refer to Turn signals 64

Combination switch, refer to Wiper system 64

Comfort Access 40

Compact wheel 196

Compartments in the doors 142

Compass 135

Compressor 175

Computer 79

Condensation on windows 131

Condensation under the vehicle 150

Condition Based Service CBS 186

Configuring drive pro- gram 109

Confirmation signal 42

Control Display 18

Control Display, settings 81

Controller 18, 19

Control systems, driving stability 106

Convenient opening 37

Coolant 185

Coolant temperature 74

Cooling function 128, 131

Cooling, maximum 130

Cooling system 185

Cornering lamp 87

Corrosion on brake discs 150

Cruise control 116

Cruise control, active 110

Cruise control, refer to camera-based cruise control 110

Cruising range 75

Cupholder 142

Current fuel consumption 75

D

Damage, tires 173

Damping control, dynamic 107

Data, technical 214

Date 75

Daytime running lights 87

Defrosting, refer to defrosting the windows 128

Defrosting, refer to Windows, defrosting 131

Defrosting the windows 128

Dehumidifying, air 128, 131

Destination distance 80

Diesel particulate filter 149

Digital clock 75

Digital compass 135

Dimensions 214

Dimmable exterior mirrors 53

Dimmable interior rearview mirror 53

Direction indicator, refer to Turn signals 64

Display, electronic, instrument cluster 72

Display lighting, refer to In-strument lighting 89

Displays 71

Displays, cleaning 210

Disposal, coolant 185

Disposal, vehicle battery 199

Distance control, refer to PDC 118

Distance to destination 80

Divided screen view, split screen 23

Door lock, refer to Remote control 34

Drive mode, GREEN mode 156

Drive-off assistant 109

Drive-off assistant, refer to DSC 106

Driving Dynamics Control 108

Driving Excitement, SPORT 80

Driving instruction, GREEN mode 158

Driving instructions, breaking in 148

Driving mode 108

Driving notes, general 148

Driving stability control systems 106

Driving style analysis 160

Driving tips 148

DSC Dynamic Stability Control 106

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 107

Dynamic Damping Control 107

Dynamic Stability Control DSC 106

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 107

E

Electronic displays, instrument cluster 72

Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to DSC 106

Emergency detection, remote control 35

Emergency release, fuel filler flap 164

Emergency Request 201

Emergency service, refer to Roadside Assistance 202

Emergency start function, engine start 35

Emergency unlocking, door lock 39

Energy Control 75

Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 61

Engine, automatic switch-off 61

Engine compartment 180

Engine compartment, working in 180

Engine coolant 185

Engine idling when driving, coasting 159

Engine oil 182

Engine oil, adding 183

Engine oil additives 183

Engine oil change 184

Engine oil filler neck 183

Engine oil temperature 74

Engine oil types, alternative 184

Engine oil types, approved 184

Engine start during malfunction 35

Engine start, jump-starting 202

Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 60

Engine stop 60

Engine temperature 74

Entering a car wash 207

Equipment, interior 133

ESP Electronic Stability Program, refer to DSC 106

Exchanging wheels/tires 173

Exhaust system 149

Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 53

Exterior mirrors 52

External start 202

External temperature display 75

External temperature warning 75

Eyes for securing cargo 152

F

Failure message, refer to Check Control 72

False alarm, refer to Unintentional alarm 43

Fan, refer to Air flow 128, 130

Fault displays, refer to Check Control 72

Favorites buttons, onboard monitor 24

Filler neck for engine oil 183

Fine wood, care 209

First aid kit 202

Fitting for towing, refer to Tow fitting 205

Flat tire, changing wheels 196

Flat Tire Monitor FTM 97

Flat tire, repairing 175

Flat tire, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 94

Flat tire, warning lamp 95, 98

Flooding 149

Floor carpet, care 210

Floor mats, care 210

Fogged up windows 128

Fold-out position, windshield wipers 66

Foot brake 149

Front airbags 91

Front fog lamps 89

Front passenger airbags, automatic deactivation 93

Front passenger airbags, indicator lamp 93

FTM Flat Tire Monitor 97

Fuel 166

Fuel cap 164

Fuel consumption, current 75

Fuel consumption, refer to Average fuel consumption 79

Fuel filler flap 164

Fuel gauge 74

Fuel quality 166

Fuel recommendation 166

Fuel, tank capacity 215

Fuse 199

G

Garage door opener, refer to Universal garage door opener 133

Gasoline 166

Gear change, automatic trans- mission 68

Gear shift indicator 76

General driving notes 148

Glass sunroof, refer to Panoramic glass sunroof 45

Glove compartment 141

GREEN mode 156

GREEN mode, bonus range 158

GREEN mode driving style analysis 160

GREEN mode indicator 156

GREEN - program, driving dynamics 108

GREEN tip 158

Gross vehicle weight, approved 214

Ground clearance 150

H

Halogen headlamps 190

Handbrake, refer to parking brake 63

Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 134

Hazard warning flashers 201

Head airbags 91

Headlamp control, automatic 87

Headlamp courtesy delay fea- ture 87

Headlamp flasher 64

Headlamp glass 189

Headlamps, care 208

Headlamp washer system 64

Headliner 17

Head restraints 47

Head restraints, front 50

Head restraints, rear 51

Head-up Display 83

Head-up Display, standard view 84

Heavy cargo, stowing 152

High-beam Assistant 88

High beams 64

High beams/low beams, refer to High-beam Assistant 88

Hills 150

Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 109

Hints 6

Holder for beverages 142

Homepage 6

Hood 180

Horn 14

Hot exhaust system 149

HUD Head-up Display 83

Hydroplaning 149

|

Ice warning, see External temperature warning 75

Icy roads, see External temperature warning 75

Identification marks, tires 171

Identification number, refer to Important features in the engine compartment 180

Ignition key, refer to Remote control 34

Ignition off 59

Ignition on 59

Illuminated ring, central instrument cluster 82

Indication of a flat tire 95, 98

Individual air distribution 128, 130

Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 35

Inflation pressure, tires 168

Inflation pressure warning, tires 97

Info display, refer to Computer 79

Initialize, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 95

Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 98

Instrument cluster 71

Instrument cluster, electronic displays 72

Instrument lighting 89

Integrated key 34

Intelligent Emergency Request 201

Intelligent Safety 99

Intensity, AUTO program 130

Interior equipment 133

Interior lamps 89

Interior lamps via remote control 37

Interior motion sensor 43

Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature 53

Interior rearview mirror, compass 135

Interior rearview mirror, manually dimmable 53

Internet site 6

Interval display, service requirements 76

J

Jacking points for the vehicle jack 196

Joystick, automatic transmission 68

Jump-starting 202

K

Key/remote control 34

Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Access 40

Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 35

Kickdown, automatic transmission 68

Knee airbag 91

L

Lamp replacement 189

Lamp replacement, front 190

Lamp replacement, rear 192

Lamp replacement, side 195

Lamps and bulbs 189

Language on Control Dis- play 82

Lashing eyes, securing cargo 152

LATCH child restraint fixing system 56

Launch Control 70

Leather, care 208

LED bug light 190

LED headlamps 190

LED ring, central instrument cluster 82

LEDs, light-emitting diodes 189

Left-hand traffic, lamp setting 89

Letters and numbers, entering 24

Light 86

Light-alloy wheels, care 209

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 189

Lighter 138

Lighting 86

Lighting via remote control 37

Light switch 86

Load 152

Loading 151

Lock, door 38

Locking/unlocking via door lock 38

Locking/unlocking with remote control 37

Locking, automatic 42

Locking, settings 42

Low beams 86

Low beams, automatic, refer to High-beam Assistant 88

Lower back support, mechanical 48

Lug bolt lock 198

Luggage rack, refer to Roof-mounted luggage rack 152

Lumbar support, mechanical 48

M

Maintenance 186

Maintenance requirements 186

Maintenance, service requirements 76

Maintenance system, MINI 186

Malfunction displays, refer to Check Control 72

Manual air distribution 128, 130

Manual air flow 128, 130

Manual mode, transmission 68

Manual operation, door lock 38

Manual operation, exterior mirrors 52

Manual operation, fuel filler flap 164

Manual operation, Park Distance Control PDC 119

Manual operation, rearview camera 121

Manual transmission 67

Manufacturer of the MINI 7

Marking on approved tires 174

Marking, run-flat tires 175

Master key, refer to Remote control 34

Maximum cooling 130

Maximum speed, display 77

Maximum speed, winter tires 174

Measure, units of 82

Medical kit 202

Menu in instrument cluster 78

Menus, refer to onboard monitor operating concept 20

Microfilter 129, 132

MID - program, driving dynamics 108

MINI Connected, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual

MINI maintenance sys- tem 186

MINIMALISM Analyser 160

MINIMALISM info 159

Minimum tread, tires 172

Mirrors 52

Mobile communication devices in the vehicle 149

Mobility System 175

Mode, GREEN Mode 156

Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 7

Moisture in headlamp 189

Monitor, refer to Control Display 18

Mounting of child restraint fixing systems 55

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 14

Multimedia, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual

N

Navigation, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual

Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 50

Neck restraints, rear, refer to Head restraints 51

New wheels and tires 173

No Passing Information 77

Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 205

0

OBD Onboard Diagnostics 186

Obstacle marking, rearview camera 122

Octane rating, refer to Recommended fuel grade 166

Odometer 74

Office, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual

Oil 182

Oil, adding 183

Oil additives 183

Oil change 184

Oil change interval, service requirements 76

Oil filler neck 183

Oil types, alternative 184

Oil types, approved 184

Old batteries, disposal 199

Onboard Diagnostics OBD 186

Onboard monitor 18

Onboard monitor operating concept 18

Onboard monitor, refer to Control Display 18

Onboard vehicle tool kit 188

Opening/closing via door lock 38

Opening/closing with remote control 37

Operating menus, onboard monitor 18

Optional equipment, standard equipment 6

Outside air, refer to Automatic recirculated-air control 131

Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 74

P

Paint, vehicle 208

Panoramic glass sunroof 45

Parallel parking assistant 122

Park Distance Control PDC 118

Parked-car ventilation 132

Parked vehicle, condensation 150

Parking aid, refer to PDC 118

Parking assistant 122

Parking brake 63

Parking lamps 86

Particulate filter 149

Parts and accessories 7

Passenger side mirror, tilting downward 52

Pathway lines, rearview camera 121

PDC Park Distance Control 118

Pedestrian warning with city braking function 103

Performance Control 107

Personal Profile 35

Phone, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual

Pinch protection system, glass sunroof 46

Pinch protection system, windows 44

Plastic, care 209

Power failure 199

Power windows 44

Pressure, tire air pressure 168

Pressure warning, tires 97

Profile, refer to Personal Profile 35

Protective function, glass sun-roof 46

Protective function, windows 44

Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 18, 19

R

Radiator fluid 185

Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 34

Radio ready state 60

Radio, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual

Rain sensor 65

Rear fog lamps 89

Rear lamps 192

Rear luggage rack 153

Rearview camera 120

Rearview mirror 52

Rear window defroster 128, 131

Recirculated-air filter 132

Recirculated-air mode 128, 131

Recommended fuel grade 166

Recommended tire brands 174

Refueling 164

Remaining range 75

Remote control/key 34

Remote control, blocking 35

Remote control, malfunction 38

Remote control, replacing the battery 34

Remote control, universal 133

Replacement fuse 199

Replacing parts 188

Replacing the battery, remote control 34

Replacing wheels/tires 173

Reporting safety defects 9

RES button 112

Reserve warning, refer to Range 75

Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 95

Retaining straps, securing cargo 152

Retreaded tires 174

Right-hand traffic, lamp setting 89

Roadside parking lamps 86

RON recommended fuel grade 166

Roof load capacity 214

Roof-mounted luggage rack 152

Rope for tow-starting/towing 205

RSC Run Flat System Component, refer to Run-flat tires 175

Rubber components, care 209

Run-flat tires 175

S

Safe braking 149

Safety 7

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 50

Safety belts 49

Safety belts, care 209

Safety systems, airbags 91

Saving fuel 155

Screen, refer to Control Display 18

Screwdriver 188

Screw thread for tow fitting 205

Sealant 175

Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 49

Seat heating, front 49

Seating position for children 55

Seats 47

Selection list in instrument cluster 78

Selector lever, automatic transmission 68

Sensors, care 210

Service and warranty 8

Service requirements, Condition Based Service CBS 186

Service requirements, display 76

Service, Roadside Assistance 202

Settings, locking/unlocking 42

Settings, mirrors 52

Settings on Control Display 81

Shifting, automatic transmission 67

Shifting, manual transmission 67

Shift paddles on steering wheel 69

Side airbags 91

Signaling, horn 14

Signals when unlocking 42

Sitting safely 47

Size 214

Slide/tilt glass roof 45

Snow chains 178

Socket 137

Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnostics 186

Soot particulate filter 149

SOS button 201

Spare fuse 199

Specified engine oil types 184

Speed, average 80

Speed limit detection, on-board computer 80

Speed limiter, display 77

Speed Limit Information 77

Speed warning 81

Split screen 23

Sport automatic transmission 69

Sport displays 80

SPORT program, Dynamic Driving Control 108

Sport program, transmission 68

Stability control systems 106

Standard view, Head-up Display 84

Start/stop, automatic function 61

Start/Stop button 59

Start function during malfunction 35

Starting the engine 60

Status display, tires 94

Status information, onboard monitor 23

Status of Owner's Manual 6

Steering wheel, adjusting 54

Steptronic, automatic trans- mission 67

Stopping the engine 60

Storage compartments 141

Storage, tires 174

Storing the vehicle 210

Summer tires, tread 172

Supplementary text messages 73

Switch for Dynamic Driving 108

Switch-on times, parked-car ventilation 132

Switch, refer to Cockpit 14

Symbols 6

Symbols in the status field 23

T

Tachometer 74

Tailgate 39

Tailgate via remote control 38

Tail lamps 192

Technical changes, refer to Safety 7

Technical data 214

Temperature, air conditioner 128

Temperature, automatic climate control 130

Temperature display for external temperature 75

Temperature, engine oil 74

Terminal, starting aid 202

Text messages, supplementary 73

Theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 42

Theft protection, lug bolts 198

Thigh support 48

Tilt alarm sensor 43

Time of arrival 80

Tire damage 173

Tire identification marks 171

Tire inflation pressure 168

Tire inflation pressure monitor, refer to FTM 97

Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 94

Tires, changing 173

Tire sealant 175

Tires, everything on wheels and tires 168

Tires, run-flat tires 175

Tire tread 172

Tone, refer to Integrated Owner's Manual

Tools 188

Total vehicle weight 214

Touchpad 21

Tourist function, refer to Right-hand/left-hand traffic 89

Tow fitting 205

Towing 203

Tow-starting 203

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 94

Traction control 107

TRACTION drive mode, driving dynamics 107

Transmission, automatic 67

Transmission lock, releasing manually 69

Transmission, manual 67

Transporting children safely 55

Tread, tires 172

Trip computer 80

Triple turn signal activation 64

Trip odometer 74

Turning circle lines, rearview camera 121

Turn signal, front 190

Turn signal, side 195

Turn signals, operation 64

Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 192

U

Unintentional alarm 43

Units of measure 82

Universal remote control 133

Unlock button, automatic transmission 68

Unlocking/locking via door lock 38

Unlocking/locking with remote control 37

Unlocking, settings 42

Updates made after the editorial deadline 6

Upholstery care 209

USB interface 137

V

Vehicle battery 198

Vehicle battery, replacing 199

Vehicle, breaking in 148

Vehicle care 208

Vehicle equipment 6

Vehicle identification number, refer to Identification number in the engine compartment 180

Vehicle jack 196

Vehicle paint 208

Vehicle storage 210

Vehicle wash 207

Ventilation 132

Ventilation, refer to Parked-car ventilation 132

Voice activation system 26

W

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 72

Warning triangle 202

Washer fluid 66

Washer nozzles, wind-shield 66

Washer system 64

Washing, vehicle 207

Water on roads 149

Weights 214

Welcome lamps 87

Wheels, changing 173

Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 168

Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 97

Wheels, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 94

Window defroster, rear 128, 131

Windows, powered 44

Windshield de- froster 129, 131

Windshield washer fluid 66

Windshield washer nozzles 66

Windshield washer system 64

Windshield wiper 64

Windshield wipers, fold-out position 66

Winter storage, care 210

Winter tires, suitable tires 174

Winter tires, tread 172

Wiper blades, replacing 188

Wiper fluid 66

Wiper system 64

Wood, care 209

Word match concept, navigation 25

Wrench 188

Black and white barcode image with vertical lines and a small white rectangle at the bottom right corner.

01 40 2 927 905 ue

DRIVE ME.

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : MINI

Model : Hardtop (2014)

Category : Automobile